+++ /dev/null
-%%\r
-%% IEEEtran.bst\r
-%% BibTeX Bibliography Style file for IEEE Journals and Conferences (unsorted)\r
-%% Version 1.13 (2008/09/30)\r
-%% \r
-%% Copyright (c) 2003-2008 Michael Shell\r
-%% \r
-%% Original starting code base and algorithms obtained from the output of\r
-%% Patrick W. Daly's makebst package as well as from prior versions of\r
-%% IEEE BibTeX styles:\r
-%% \r
-%% 1. Howard Trickey and Oren Patashnik's ieeetr.bst (1985/1988)\r
-%% 2. Silvano Balemi and Richard H. Roy's IEEEbib.bst (1993)\r
-%% \r
-%% Support sites:\r
-%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/\r
-%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/\r
-%% and/or\r
-%% http://www.ieee.org/\r
-%% \r
-%% For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later\r
-%%\r
-%% This is a numerical citation style.\r
-%% \r
-%%*************************************************************************\r
-%% Legal Notice:\r
-%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or\r
-%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or\r
-%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! \r
-%% User assumes all risk.\r
-%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for\r
-%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,\r
-%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse\r
-%% of any information contained here.\r
-%%\r
-%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not\r
-%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.\r
-%%\r
-%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)\r
-%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,\r
-%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included\r
-%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released\r
-%% 2003/12/01 or later.\r
-%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.\r
-%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **\r
-%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **\r
-%%\r
-%% File list of work: IEEEabrv.bib, IEEEfull.bib, IEEEexample.bib,\r
-%% IEEEtran.bst, IEEEtranS.bst, IEEEtranSA.bst,\r
-%% IEEEtranN.bst, IEEEtranSN.bst, IEEEtran_bst_HOWTO.pdf\r
-%%*************************************************************************\r
-%\r
-%\r
-% Changelog:\r
-%\r
-% 1.00 (2002/08/13) Initial release\r
-%\r
-% 1.10 (2002/09/27)\r
-% 1. Corrected minor bug for improperly formed warning message when a\r
-% book was not given a title. Thanks to Ming Kin Lai for reporting this.\r
-% 2. Added support for CTLname_format_string and CTLname_latex_cmd fields\r
-% in the BST control entry type.\r
-%\r
-% 1.11 (2003/04/02)\r
-% 1. Fixed bug with URLs containing underscores when using url.sty. Thanks\r
-% to Ming Kin Lai for reporting this.\r
-%\r
-% 1.12 (2007/01/11)\r
-% 1. Fixed bug with unwanted comma before "et al." when an entry contained\r
-% more than two author names. Thanks to Pallav Gupta for reporting this.\r
-% 2. Fixed bug with anomalous closing quote in tech reports that have a\r
-% type, but without a number or address. Thanks to Mehrdad Mirreza for\r
-% reporting this.\r
-% 3. Use braces in \providecommand in begin.bib to better support\r
-% latex2html. TeX style length assignments OK with recent versions\r
-% of latex2html - 1.71 (2002/2/1) or later is strongly recommended.\r
-% Use of the language field still causes trouble with latex2html.\r
-% Thanks to Federico Beffa for reporting this.\r
-% 4. Added IEEEtran.bst ID and version comment string to .bbl output.\r
-% 5. Provide a \BIBdecl hook that allows the user to execute commands\r
-% just prior to the first entry.\r
-% 6. Use default urlstyle (is using url.sty) of "same" rather than rm to\r
-% better work with a wider variety of bibliography styles.\r
-% 7. Changed month abbreviations from Sept., July and June to Sep., Jul.,\r
-% and Jun., respectively, as IEEE now does. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann\r
-% for reporting this.\r
-% 8. Control entry types should not be considered when calculating longest\r
-% label width.\r
-% 9. Added alias www for electronic/online.\r
-% 10. Added CTLname_url_prefix control entry type.\r
-%\r
-% 1.13 (2008/09/30)\r
-% 1. Fixed bug with edition number to ordinal conversion. Thanks to\r
-% Michael Roland for reporting this and correcting the algorithm.\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% DEFAULTS FOR THE CONTROLS OF THE BST STYLE %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-% These are the defaults for the user adjustable controls. The values used\r
-% here can be overridden by the user via IEEEtranBSTCTL entry type.\r
-\r
-% NOTE: The recommended LaTeX command to invoke a control entry type is:\r
-% \r
-%\makeatletter\r
-%\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}\r
-%\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack\r
-% \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%\r
-% \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%\r
-% \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%\r
-% \@esphack}\r
-%\makeatother\r
-%\r
-% It is called at the start of the document, before the first \cite, like:\r
-% \bstctlcite{IEEEexample:BSTcontrol}\r
-%\r
-% IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later does provide this command.\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the display of the number for articles.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.use.number.for.article} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the display of the paper and type fields in @inproceedings.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.use.paper} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the forced use of "et al."\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.forced.et.al} { #0 }\r
-\r
-% The maximum number of names that can be present beyond which an "et al."\r
-% usage is forced. Be sure that num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al (below)\r
-% is not greater than this value!\r
-% Note: There are many instances of references in IEEE journals which have\r
-% a very large number of authors as well as instances in which "et al." is\r
-% used profusely.\r
-FUNCTION {default.max.num.names.before.forced.et.al} { #10 }\r
-\r
-% The number of names that will be shown with a forced "et al.".\r
-% Must be less than or equal to max.num.names.before.forced.et.al\r
-FUNCTION {default.num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the alternate interword spacing for entries with URLs.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.use.alt.interword.spacing} { #1 }\r
-\r
-% If alternate interword spacing for entries with URLs is enabled, this is\r
-% the interword spacing stretch factor that will be used. For example, the\r
-% default "4" here means that the interword spacing in entries with URLs can\r
-% stretch to four times normal. Does not have to be an integer. Note that\r
-% the value specified here can be overridden by the user in their LaTeX\r
-% code via a command such as: \r
-% "\providecommand\BIBentryALTinterwordstretchfactor{1.5}" in addition to\r
-% that via the IEEEtranBSTCTL entry type.\r
-FUNCTION {default.ALTinterwordstretchfactor} { "4" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the "dashification" of repeated (i.e., identical to those\r
-% of the previous entry) names. IEEE normally does this.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.dash.repeated.names} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-% The default name format control string.\r
-FUNCTION {default.name.format.string}{ "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% The default LaTeX font command for the names.\r
-FUNCTION {default.name.latex.cmd}{ "" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% The default URL prefix.\r
-FUNCTION {default.name.url.prefix}{ "[Online]. Available:" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% Other controls that cannot be accessed via IEEEtranBSTCTL entry type.\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the terminal startup banner/completed message so as to\r
-% operate more quietly.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {is.print.banners.to.terminal} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% FILE VERSION AND BANNER %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION{bst.file.version} { "1.13" }\r
-FUNCTION{bst.file.date} { "2008/09/30" }\r
-FUNCTION{bst.file.website} { "http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/" }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {banner.message}\r
-{ is.print.banners.to.terminal\r
- { "-- IEEEtran.bst version" " " * bst.file.version *\r
- " (" * bst.file.date * ") " * "by Michael Shell." *\r
- top$\r
- "-- " bst.file.website *\r
- top$\r
- "-- See the " quote$ * "IEEEtran_bst_HOWTO.pdf" * quote$ * " manual for usage information." *\r
- top$\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {completed.message}\r
-{ is.print.banners.to.terminal\r
- { ""\r
- top$\r
- "Done."\r
- top$\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% STRING CONSTANTS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.and}{ "and" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.etal}{ "et~al." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.editors}{ "eds." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.editor}{ "ed." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.edition}{ "ed." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.volume}{ "vol." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.of}{ "of" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.number}{ "no." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.in}{ "in" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.pages}{ "pp." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.page}{ "p." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}{ "ch." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.paper}{ "paper" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.part}{ "pt." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.patent}{ "Patent" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.patentUS}{ "U.S." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.revision}{ "Rev." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.series}{ "ser." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.standard}{ "Std." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}{ "Tech. Rep." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}{ "Master's thesis" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}{ "Ph.D. dissertation" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.st}{ "st" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.nd}{ "nd" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.rd}{ "rd" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.th}{ "th" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% This is the LaTeX spacer that is used when a larger than normal space\r
-% is called for (such as just before the address:publisher).\r
-FUNCTION {large.space} { "\hskip 1em plus 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax " }\r
-\r
-% The LaTeX code for dashes that are used to represent repeated names.\r
-% Note: Some older IEEE journals used something like\r
-% "\rule{0.275in}{0.5pt}\," which is fairly thick and runs right along\r
-% the baseline. However, IEEE now uses a thinner, above baseline,\r
-% six dash long sequence.\r
-FUNCTION {repeated.name.dashes} { "------" }\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% PREDEFINED STRING MACROS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}\r
-MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}\r
-MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}\r
-MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}\r
-MACRO {may} {"May"}\r
-MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}\r
-MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}\r
-MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}\r
-MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}\r
-MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}\r
-MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}\r
-MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% ENTRY FIELDS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-ENTRY\r
- { address\r
- assignee\r
- author\r
- booktitle\r
- chapter\r
- day\r
- dayfiled\r
- edition\r
- editor\r
- howpublished\r
- institution\r
- intype\r
- journal\r
- key\r
- language\r
- month\r
- monthfiled\r
- nationality\r
- note\r
- number\r
- organization\r
- pages\r
- paper\r
- publisher\r
- school\r
- series\r
- revision\r
- title\r
- type\r
- url\r
- volume\r
- year\r
- yearfiled\r
- CTLuse_article_number\r
- CTLuse_paper\r
- CTLuse_forced_etal\r
- CTLmax_names_forced_etal\r
- CTLnames_show_etal\r
- CTLuse_alt_spacing\r
- CTLalt_stretch_factor\r
- CTLdash_repeated_names\r
- CTLname_format_string\r
- CTLname_latex_cmd\r
- CTLname_url_prefix\r
- }\r
- {}\r
- { label }\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% INTEGER VARIABLES %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-INTEGERS { prev.status.punct this.status.punct punct.std\r
- punct.no punct.comma punct.period \r
- prev.status.space this.status.space space.std\r
- space.no space.normal space.large\r
- prev.status.quote this.status.quote quote.std\r
- quote.no quote.close\r
- prev.status.nline this.status.nline nline.std\r
- nline.no nline.newblock \r
- status.cap cap.std\r
- cap.no cap.yes}\r
-\r
-INTEGERS { longest.label.width multiresult nameptr namesleft number.label numnames }\r
-\r
-INTEGERS { is.use.number.for.article\r
- is.use.paper\r
- is.forced.et.al\r
- max.num.names.before.forced.et.al\r
- num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al\r
- is.use.alt.interword.spacing\r
- is.dash.repeated.names}\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% STRING VARIABLES %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-STRINGS { bibinfo\r
- longest.label\r
- oldname\r
- s\r
- t\r
- ALTinterwordstretchfactor\r
- name.format.string\r
- name.latex.cmd\r
- name.url.prefix}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% LOW LEVEL FUNCTIONS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {initialize.controls}\r
-{ default.is.use.number.for.article 'is.use.number.for.article :=\r
- default.is.use.paper 'is.use.paper :=\r
- default.is.forced.et.al 'is.forced.et.al :=\r
- default.max.num.names.before.forced.et.al 'max.num.names.before.forced.et.al :=\r
- default.num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al 'num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al :=\r
- default.is.use.alt.interword.spacing 'is.use.alt.interword.spacing :=\r
- default.is.dash.repeated.names 'is.dash.repeated.names :=\r
- default.ALTinterwordstretchfactor 'ALTinterwordstretchfactor :=\r
- default.name.format.string 'name.format.string :=\r
- default.name.latex.cmd 'name.latex.cmd :=\r
- default.name.url.prefix 'name.url.prefix :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% This IEEEtran.bst features a very powerful and flexible mechanism for\r
-% controlling the capitalization, punctuation, spacing, quotation, and\r
-% newlines of the formatted entry fields. (Note: IEEEtran.bst does not need\r
-% or use the newline/newblock feature, but it has been implemented for\r
-% possible future use.) The output states of IEEEtran.bst consist of\r
-% multiple independent attributes and, as such, can be thought of as being\r
-% vectors, rather than the simple scalar values ("before.all", \r
-% "mid.sentence", etc.) used in most other .bst files.\r
-% \r
-% The more flexible and complex design used here was motivated in part by\r
-% IEEE's rather unusual bibliography style. For example, IEEE ends the\r
-% previous field item with a period and large space prior to the publisher\r
-% address; the @electronic entry types use periods as inter-item punctuation\r
-% rather than the commas used by the other entry types; and URLs are never\r
-% followed by periods even though they are the last item in the entry.\r
-% Although it is possible to accommodate these features with the conventional\r
-% output state system, the seemingly endless exceptions make for convoluted,\r
-% unreliable and difficult to maintain code.\r
-%\r
-% IEEEtran.bst's output state system can be easily understood via a simple\r
-% illustration of two most recently formatted entry fields (on the stack):\r
-%\r
-% CURRENT_ITEM\r
-% "PREVIOUS_ITEM\r
-%\r
-% which, in this example, is to eventually appear in the bibliography as:\r
-% \r
-% "PREVIOUS_ITEM," CURRENT_ITEM\r
-%\r
-% It is the job of the output routine to take the previous item off of the\r
-% stack (while leaving the current item at the top of the stack), apply its\r
-% trailing punctuation (including closing quote marks) and spacing, and then\r
-% to write the result to BibTeX's output buffer:\r
-% \r
-% "PREVIOUS_ITEM," \r
-% \r
-% Punctuation (and spacing) between items is often determined by both of the\r
-% items rather than just the first one. The presence of quotation marks\r
-% further complicates the situation because, in standard English, trailing\r
-% punctuation marks are supposed to be contained within the quotes.\r
-% \r
-% IEEEtran.bst maintains two output state (aka "status") vectors which\r
-% correspond to the previous and current (aka "this") items. Each vector\r
-% consists of several independent attributes which track punctuation,\r
-% spacing, quotation, and newlines. Capitalization status is handled by a\r
-% separate scalar because the format routines, not the output routine,\r
-% handle capitalization and, therefore, there is no need to maintain the\r
-% capitalization attribute for both the "previous" and "this" items.\r
-% \r
-% When a format routine adds a new item, it copies the current output status\r
-% vector to the previous output status vector and (usually) resets the\r
-% current (this) output status vector to a "standard status" vector. Using a\r
-% "standard status" vector in this way allows us to redefine what we mean by\r
-% "standard status" at the start of each entry handler and reuse the same\r
-% format routines under the various inter-item separation schemes. For\r
-% example, the standard status vector for the @book entry type may use\r
-% commas for item separators, while the @electronic type may use periods,\r
-% yet both entry handlers exploit many of the exact same format routines.\r
-% \r
-% Because format routines have write access to the output status vector of\r
-% the previous item, they can override the punctuation choices of the\r
-% previous format routine! Therefore, it becomes trivial to implement rules\r
-% such as "Always use a period and a large space before the publisher." By\r
-% pushing the generation of the closing quote mark to the output routine, we\r
-% avoid all the problems caused by having to close a quote before having all\r
-% the information required to determine what the punctuation should be.\r
-%\r
-% The IEEEtran.bst output state system can easily be expanded if needed.\r
-% For instance, it is easy to add a "space.tie" attribute value if the\r
-% bibliography rules mandate that two items have to be joined with an\r
-% unbreakable space. \r
-\r
-FUNCTION {initialize.status.constants}\r
-{ #0 'punct.no :=\r
- #1 'punct.comma :=\r
- #2 'punct.period :=\r
- #0 'space.no := \r
- #1 'space.normal :=\r
- #2 'space.large :=\r
- #0 'quote.no :=\r
- #1 'quote.close :=\r
- #0 'cap.no :=\r
- #1 'cap.yes :=\r
- #0 'nline.no :=\r
- #1 'nline.newblock :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {std.status.using.comma}\r
-{ punct.comma 'punct.std :=\r
- space.normal 'space.std :=\r
- quote.no 'quote.std :=\r
- nline.no 'nline.std :=\r
- cap.no 'cap.std :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {std.status.using.period}\r
-{ punct.period 'punct.std :=\r
- space.normal 'space.std :=\r
- quote.no 'quote.std :=\r
- nline.no 'nline.std :=\r
- cap.yes 'cap.std :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {initialize.prev.this.status}\r
-{ punct.no 'prev.status.punct :=\r
- space.no 'prev.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'prev.status.quote :=\r
- nline.no 'prev.status.nline :=\r
- punct.no 'this.status.punct :=\r
- space.no 'this.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'this.status.quote :=\r
- nline.no 'this.status.nline :=\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {this.status.std}\r
-{ punct.std 'this.status.punct :=\r
- space.std 'this.status.space :=\r
- quote.std 'this.status.quote :=\r
- nline.std 'this.status.nline :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {cap.status.std}{ cap.std 'status.cap := }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {this.to.prev.status}\r
-{ this.status.punct 'prev.status.punct :=\r
- this.status.space 'prev.status.space :=\r
- this.status.quote 'prev.status.quote :=\r
- this.status.nline 'prev.status.nline :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {not}\r
-{ { #0 }\r
- { #1 }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {and}\r
-{ { skip$ }\r
- { pop$ #0 }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {or}\r
-{ { pop$ #1 }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% convert the strings "yes" or "no" to #1 or #0 respectively\r
-FUNCTION {yes.no.to.int}\r
-{ "l" change.case$ duplicate$\r
- "yes" =\r
- { pop$ #1 }\r
- { duplicate$ "no" =\r
- { pop$ #0 }\r
- { "unknown boolean " quote$ * swap$ * quote$ *\r
- " in " * cite$ * warning$\r
- #0\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% pushes true if the single char string on the stack is in the\r
-% range of "0" to "9"\r
-FUNCTION {is.num}\r
-{ chr.to.int$\r
- duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not\r
- swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and\r
-}\r
-\r
-% multiplies the integer on the stack by a factor of 10\r
-FUNCTION {bump.int.mag}\r
-{ #0 'multiresult :=\r
- { duplicate$ #0 > }\r
- { #1 -\r
- multiresult #10 +\r
- 'multiresult :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-pop$\r
-multiresult\r
-}\r
-\r
-% converts a single character string on the stack to an integer\r
-FUNCTION {char.to.integer}\r
-{ duplicate$ \r
- is.num\r
- { chr.to.int$ "0" chr.to.int$ - }\r
- {"noninteger character " quote$ * swap$ * quote$ *\r
- " in integer field of " * cite$ * warning$\r
- #0\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% converts a string on the stack to an integer\r
-FUNCTION {string.to.integer}\r
-{ duplicate$ text.length$ 'namesleft :=\r
- #1 'nameptr :=\r
- #0 'numnames :=\r
- { nameptr namesleft > not }\r
- { duplicate$ nameptr #1 substring$\r
- char.to.integer numnames bump.int.mag +\r
- 'numnames :=\r
- nameptr #1 +\r
- 'nameptr :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-pop$\r
-numnames\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% The output routines write out the *next* to the top (previous) item on the\r
-% stack, adding punctuation and such as needed. Since IEEEtran.bst maintains\r
-% the output status for the top two items on the stack, these output\r
-% routines have to consider the previous output status (which corresponds to\r
-% the item that is being output). Full independent control of punctuation,\r
-% closing quote marks, spacing, and newblock is provided.\r
-% \r
-% "output.nonnull" does not check for the presence of a previous empty\r
-% item.\r
-% \r
-% "output" does check for the presence of a previous empty item and will\r
-% remove an empty item rather than outputing it.\r
-% \r
-% "output.warn" is like "output", but will issue a warning if it detects\r
-% an empty item.\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {output.nonnull}\r
-{ swap$\r
- prev.status.punct punct.comma =\r
- { "," * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- prev.status.punct punct.period =\r
- { add.period$ }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$ \r
- prev.status.quote quote.close =\r
- { "''" * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- prev.status.space space.normal =\r
- { " " * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- prev.status.space space.large =\r
- { large.space * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- write$\r
- prev.status.nline nline.newblock =\r
- { newline$ "\newblock " write$ }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {output}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$\r
- 'pop$\r
- 'output.nonnull\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {output.warn}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }\r
- 'output.nonnull\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% "fin.entry" is the output routine that handles the last item of the entry\r
-% (which will be on the top of the stack when "fin.entry" is called).\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {fin.entry}\r
-{ this.status.punct punct.no =\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { add.period$ }\r
- if$\r
- this.status.quote quote.close =\r
- { "''" * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-write$\r
-newline$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {is.last.char.not.punct}\r
-{ duplicate$\r
- "}" * add.period$\r
- #-1 #1 substring$ "." =\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {is.multiple.pages}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- #0 'multiresult :=\r
- { multiresult not\r
- t empty$ not\r
- and\r
- }\r
- { t #1 #1 substring$\r
- duplicate$ "-" =\r
- swap$ duplicate$ "," =\r
- swap$ "+" =\r
- or or\r
- { #1 'multiresult := }\r
- { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- while$\r
- multiresult\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {capitalize}{ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$ }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {emphasize}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ "" }\r
-%% Turned off for MESH2013\r
-% { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
-%%\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {do.name.latex.cmd}\r
-{ name.latex.cmd\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { name.latex.cmd "{" * swap$ * "}" * }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% IEEEtran.bst uses its own \BIBforeignlanguage command which directly\r
-% invokes the TeX hyphenation patterns without the need of the Babel\r
-% package. Babel does a lot more than switch hyphenation patterns and\r
-% its loading can cause unintended effects in many class files (such as\r
-% IEEEtran.cls).\r
-FUNCTION {select.language}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$\r
- { language empty$ 'skip$\r
- { "\BIBforeignlanguage{" language * "}{" * swap$ * "}" * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}\r
-{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <\r
- { "~" }\r
- { " " }\r
- if$\r
- swap$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}\r
-{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$ }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {space.word}{ " " swap$ * " " * }\r
-\r
-\r
-% Field Conditioners, Converters, Checkers and External Interfaces\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {empty.field.to.null.string}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ "" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {either.or.check}\r
-{ empty$\r
- { pop$ }\r
- { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {empty.entry.warn}\r
-{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$\r
- month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ url empty$\r
- and and and and and and\r
- { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- 'skip$\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% The bibinfo system provides a way for the electronic parsing/acquisition\r
-% of a bibliography's contents as is done by ReVTeX. For example, a field\r
-% could be entered into the bibliography as:\r
-% \bibinfo{volume}{2}\r
-% Only the "2" would show up in the document, but the LaTeX \bibinfo command\r
-% could do additional things with the information. IEEEtran.bst does provide\r
-% a \bibinfo command via "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}". However, it is\r
-% currently not used as the bogus bibinfo functions defined here output the\r
-% entry values directly without the \bibinfo wrapper. The bibinfo functions\r
-% themselves (and the calls to them) are retained for possible future use.\r
-% \r
-% bibinfo.check avoids acting on missing fields while bibinfo.warn will\r
-% issue a warning message if a missing field is detected. Prior to calling\r
-% the bibinfo functions, the user should push the field value and then its\r
-% name string, in that order.\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}\r
-{ swap$ duplicate$ missing$\r
- { pop$ pop$ "" }\r
- { duplicate$ empty$\r
- { swap$ pop$ }\r
- { swap$ pop$ }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}\r
-{ swap$ duplicate$ missing$\r
- { swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$ "" }\r
- { duplicate$ empty$\r
- { swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }\r
- { swap$ pop$ }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% IEEE separates large numbers with more than 4 digits into groups of\r
-% three. IEEE uses a small space to separate these number groups. \r
-% Typical applications include patent and page numbers.\r
-\r
-% number of consecutive digits required to trigger the group separation.\r
-FUNCTION {large.number.trigger}{ #5 }\r
-\r
-% For numbers longer than the trigger, this is the blocksize of the groups.\r
-% The blocksize must be less than the trigger threshold, and 2 * blocksize\r
-% must be greater than the trigger threshold (can't do more than one\r
-% separation on the initial trigger).\r
-FUNCTION {large.number.blocksize}{ #3 }\r
-\r
-% What is actually inserted between the number groups.\r
-FUNCTION {large.number.separator}{ "\," }\r
-\r
-% So as to save on integer variables by reusing existing ones, numnames\r
-% holds the current number of consecutive digits read and nameptr holds\r
-% the number that will trigger an inserted space.\r
-FUNCTION {large.number.separate}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- ""\r
- #0 'numnames :=\r
- large.number.trigger 'nameptr :=\r
- { t empty$ not }\r
- { t #-1 #1 substring$ is.num\r
- { numnames #1 + 'numnames := }\r
- { #0 'numnames := \r
- large.number.trigger 'nameptr :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- t #-1 #1 substring$ swap$ *\r
- t #-2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- numnames nameptr =\r
- { duplicate$ #1 nameptr large.number.blocksize - substring$ swap$\r
- nameptr large.number.blocksize - #1 + global.max$ substring$\r
- large.number.separator swap$ * *\r
- nameptr large.number.blocksize - 'numnames :=\r
- large.number.blocksize #1 + 'nameptr :=\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% Converts all single dashes "-" to double dashes "--".\r
-FUNCTION {n.dashify}\r
-{ large.number.separate\r
- 't :=\r
- ""\r
- { t empty$ not }\r
- { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =\r
- { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not\r
- { "--" *\r
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- }\r
- { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }\r
- { "-" *\r
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { t #1 #1 substring$ *\r
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% This function detects entries with names that are identical to that of\r
-% the previous entry and replaces the repeated names with dashes (if the\r
-% "is.dash.repeated.names" user control is nonzero).\r
-FUNCTION {name.or.dash}\r
-{ 's :=\r
- oldname empty$\r
- { s 'oldname := s }\r
- { s oldname =\r
- { is.dash.repeated.names\r
- { repeated.name.dashes }\r
- { s 'oldname := s }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { s 'oldname := s }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% Converts the number string on the top of the stack to\r
-% "numerical ordinal form" (e.g., "7" to "7th"). There is\r
-% no artificial limit to the upper bound of the numbers as the\r
-% two least significant digits determine the ordinal form.\r
-FUNCTION {num.to.ordinal}\r
-{ duplicate$ #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =\r
- { bbl.th * }\r
- { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ "1" =\r
- { bbl.st * }\r
- { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ "2" =\r
- { bbl.nd * }\r
- { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ "3" =\r
- { bbl.rd * }\r
- { bbl.th * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% If the string on the top of the stack begins with a number,\r
-% (e.g., 11th) then replace the string with the leading number\r
-% it contains. Otherwise retain the string as-is. s holds the\r
-% extracted number, t holds the part of the string that remains\r
-% to be scanned.\r
-FUNCTION {extract.num}\r
-{ duplicate$ 't :=\r
- "" 's :=\r
- { t empty$ not }\r
- { t #1 #1 substring$\r
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- duplicate$ is.num\r
- { s swap$ * 's := }\r
- { pop$ "" 't := }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- while$\r
- s empty$\r
- 'skip$\r
- { pop$ s }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% Converts the word number string on the top of the stack to\r
-% Arabic string form. Will be successful up to "tenth".\r
-FUNCTION {word.to.num}\r
-{ duplicate$ "l" change.case$ 's :=\r
- s "first" =\r
- { pop$ "1" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "second" =\r
- { pop$ "2" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "third" =\r
- { pop$ "3" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "fourth" =\r
- { pop$ "4" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "fifth" =\r
- { pop$ "5" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "sixth" =\r
- { pop$ "6" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "seventh" =\r
- { pop$ "7" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "eighth" =\r
- { pop$ "8" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "ninth" =\r
- { pop$ "9" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "tenth" =\r
- { pop$ "10" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% Converts the string on the top of the stack to numerical\r
-% ordinal (e.g., "11th") form.\r
-FUNCTION {convert.edition}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ is.num\r
- { extract.num\r
- num.to.ordinal\r
- }\r
- { word.to.num\r
- duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ is.num\r
- { num.to.ordinal }\r
- { "edition ordinal word " quote$ * edition * quote$ *\r
- " may be too high (or improper) for conversion" * " in " * cite$ * warning$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% LATEX BIBLIOGRAPHY CODE %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {start.entry}\r
-{ newline$\r
- "\bibitem{" write$\r
- cite$ write$\r
- "}" write$\r
- newline$\r
- ""\r
- initialize.prev.this.status\r
-}\r
-\r
-% Here we write out all the LaTeX code that we will need. The most involved\r
-% code sequences are those that control the alternate interword spacing and\r
-% foreign language hyphenation patterns. The heavy use of \providecommand\r
-% gives users a way to override the defaults. Special thanks to Javier Bezos,\r
-% Johannes Braams, Robin Fairbairns, Heiko Oberdiek, Donald Arseneau and all\r
-% the other gurus on comp.text.tex for their help and advice on the topic of\r
-% \selectlanguage, Babel and BibTeX.\r
-FUNCTION {begin.bib}\r
-{ "% Generated by IEEEtran.bst, version: " bst.file.version * " (" * bst.file.date * ")" *\r
- write$ newline$\r
- preamble$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { preamble$ write$ newline$ }\r
- if$\r
- "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" *\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\url}[1]{#1}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\csname url@samestyle\endcsname"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\newblock}{\relax}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBentrySTDinterwordspacing}{\spaceskip=0pt\relax}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBentryALTinterwordstretchfactor}{"\r
- ALTinterwordstretchfactor * "}" *\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBentryALTinterwordspacing}{\spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font plus "\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\BIBentryALTinterwordstretchfactor\fontdimen3\font minus \fontdimen4\font\relax}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBforeignlanguage}[2]{{%"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEtran.bst: No hyphenation pattern has been}%"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\typeout{** loaded for the language `#1'. Using the pattern for}%"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\typeout{** the default language instead.}%"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\else"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\language=\csname l@#1\endcsname"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\fi"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "#2}}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBdecl}{\relax}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\BIBdecl"\r
- write$ newline$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {end.bib}\r
-{ newline$ "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {if.url.alt.interword.spacing}\r
-{ is.use.alt.interword.spacing \r
- {url empty$ 'skip$ {"\BIBentryALTinterwordspacing" write$ newline$} if$}\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {if.url.std.interword.spacing}\r
-{ is.use.alt.interword.spacing \r
- {url empty$ 'skip$ {"\BIBentrySTDinterwordspacing" write$ newline$} if$}\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% LONGEST LABEL PASS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label}\r
-{ "" 'longest.label :=\r
- #1 'number.label :=\r
- #0 'longest.label.width :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {longest.label.pass}\r
-{ type$ "ieeetranbstctl" =\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { number.label int.to.str$ 'label :=\r
- number.label #1 + 'number.label :=\r
- label width$ longest.label.width >\r
- { label 'longest.label :=\r
- label width$ 'longest.label.width :=\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% FORMAT HANDLERS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-%% Lower Level Formats (used by higher level formats)\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address.org.or.pub.date}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- ""\r
- year empty$\r
- { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- address empty$ t empty$ and\r
- year empty$ and month empty$ and\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- address "address" bibinfo.check *\r
- t empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { punct.period 'prev.status.punct :=\r
- space.large 'prev.status.space :=\r
- address empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { ": " * }\r
- if$\r
- t *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- year empty$ month empty$ and\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { t empty$ address empty$ and\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { ", " * }\r
- if$\r
- month empty$\r
- { year empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { year "year" bibinfo.check * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { month "month" bibinfo.check *\r
- year empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { " " * year "year" bibinfo.check * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.names}\r
-{ 'bibinfo :=\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {\r
- this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- 's :=\r
- "" 't :=\r
- #1 'nameptr :=\r
- s num.names$ 'numnames :=\r
- numnames 'namesleft :=\r
- { namesleft #0 > }\r
- { s nameptr\r
- name.format.string\r
- format.name$\r
- bibinfo bibinfo.check\r
- 't :=\r
- nameptr #1 >\r
- { nameptr num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al #1 + =\r
- numnames max.num.names.before.forced.et.al >\r
- is.forced.et.al and and\r
- { "others" 't :=\r
- #1 'namesleft :=\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- namesleft #1 >\r
- { ", " * t do.name.latex.cmd * }\r
- { s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =\r
- { 't := }\r
- { pop$ }\r
- if$\r
- t "others" =\r
- { " " * bbl.etal emphasize * }\r
- { numnames #2 >\r
- { "," * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- bbl.and\r
- space.word * t do.name.latex.cmd *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { t do.name.latex.cmd }\r
- if$\r
- nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=\r
- namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
- cap.status.std\r
- } if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% Higher Level Formats\r
-\r
-%% addresses/locations\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address}\r
-{ address duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% author/editor names\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.authors}{ author "author" format.names }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.editors}\r
-{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { ", " *\r
- get.bbl.editor\r
- capitalize\r
- *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% date\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.date}\r
-{\r
- month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$\r
- year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$\r
- { swap$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- if$\r
- *\r
- }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- swap$ 'skip$\r
- {\r
- swap$\r
- " " * swap$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% WARNING: This function was modified to adhere to the formatting rules\r
-% of MESH2013 conference for entries with both month and year specified.\r
-% It will not work properly otherwise.\r
-FUNCTION {format.date.electronic}\r
-{ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$\r
- month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$\r
- { swap$ \r
- { pop$ }\r
- { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$\r
- pop$ ")" * "(" swap$ *\r
- this.to.prev.status\r
- punct.no 'this.status.punct :=\r
- space.normal 'this.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'this.status.quote :=\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { swap$ \r
- { swap$ pop$ ")" * "(" swap$ * }\r
- { "[retrieved: " swap$ * ", " * swap$ * "]" * }\r
- if$\r
- this.to.prev.status\r
- punct.no 'this.status.punct :=\r
- space.normal 'this.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'this.status.quote :=\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% edition/title\r
-\r
-% Note: IEEE considers the edition to be closely associated with\r
-% the title of a book. So, in IEEEtran.bst the edition is normally handled \r
-% within the formatting of the title. The format.edition function is \r
-% retained here for possible future use.\r
-FUNCTION {format.edition}\r
-{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- convert.edition\r
- status.cap\r
- { "t" }\r
- { "l" }\r
- if$ change.case$\r
- "edition" bibinfo.check\r
- "~" * bbl.edition *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% This is used to format the booktitle of a conference proceedings.\r
-% Here we use the "intype" field to provide the user a way to \r
-% override the word "in" (e.g., with things like "presented at")\r
-% Use of intype stops the emphasis of the booktitle to indicate that\r
-% we no longer mean the written conference proceedings, but the\r
-% conference itself.\r
-FUNCTION {format.in.booktitle}\r
-{ booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- intype missing$\r
- { emphasize\r
- bbl.in " " *\r
- }\r
- { intype " " * }\r
- if$\r
- swap$ *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% This is used to format the booktitle of collection.\r
-% Here the "intype" field is not supported, but "edition" is.\r
-FUNCTION {format.in.booktitle.edition}\r
-{ booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- emphasize\r
- edition empty$ 'skip$\r
- { ", " *\r
- edition\r
- convert.edition\r
- "l" change.case$\r
- * "~" * bbl.edition *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- bbl.in " " * swap$ *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.article.title}\r
-{ title duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- "t" change.case$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- "title" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { quote.close 'this.status.quote :=\r
- is.last.char.not.punct\r
- { punct.std 'this.status.punct := }\r
- { punct.no 'this.status.punct := }\r
- if$\r
- select.language\r
- "``" swap$ *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.article.title.electronic}\r
-{ title duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- "t" change.case$ \r
- }\r
- if$\r
- "title" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ empty$ \r
- { skip$ } \r
- { select.language }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.book.title.edition}\r
-{ title "title" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "empty title in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- emphasize\r
- edition empty$ 'skip$\r
- { ", " *\r
- edition\r
- convert.edition\r
- status.cap\r
- { "t" }\r
- { "l" }\r
- if$\r
- change.case$\r
- * "~" * bbl.edition *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.book.title}\r
-{ title "title" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- emphasize\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% journal\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.journal}\r
-{ journal duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- emphasize\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% how published\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.howpublished}\r
-{ howpublished duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% institutions/organization/publishers/school\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.institution}\r
-{ institution duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.organization}\r
-{ organization duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.date}\r
-{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.address.org.or.pub.date }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.date.nowarn}\r
-{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.check format.address.org.or.pub.date }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address.organization.date}\r
-{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.address.org.or.pub.date }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.school}\r
-{ school duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% volume/number/series/chapter/pages\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.volume}\r
-{ volume empty.field.to.null.string\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- bbl.volume \r
- status.cap\r
- { capitalize }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- swap$ tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "volume" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.number}\r
-{ number empty.field.to.null.string\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- status.cap\r
- { bbl.number capitalize }\r
- { bbl.number }\r
- if$\r
- swap$ tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "number" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.number.if.use.for.article}\r
-{ is.use.number.for.article \r
- { format.number }\r
- { "" }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% IEEE does not seem to tie the series so closely with the volume\r
-% and number as is done in other bibliography styles. Instead the\r
-% series is treated somewhat like an extension of the title.\r
-FUNCTION {format.series}\r
-{ series empty$ \r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- bbl.series " " *\r
- series "series" bibinfo.check *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.chapter}\r
-{ chapter empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type empty$\r
- { bbl.chapter }\r
- { type "l" change.case$\r
- "type" bibinfo.check\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- chapter tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "chapter" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% The intended use of format.paper is for paper numbers of inproceedings.\r
-% The paper type can be overridden via the type field.\r
-% We allow the type to be displayed even if the paper number is absent\r
-% for things like "postdeadline paper"\r
-FUNCTION {format.paper}\r
-{ is.use.paper\r
- { paper empty$\r
- { type empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type "type" bibinfo.check\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type empty$\r
- { bbl.paper }\r
- { type "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$\r
- " " * paper\r
- "paper" bibinfo.check\r
- *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { "" } \r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.pages}\r
-{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- duplicate$ is.multiple.pages\r
- {\r
- bbl.pages swap$\r
- n.dashify\r
- }\r
- {\r
- bbl.page swap$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "pages" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% technical report number\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.tech.report.number}\r
-{ number "number" bibinfo.check\r
- this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- type duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ \r
- bbl.techrep\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- "type" bibinfo.check \r
- swap$ duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ }\r
- { tie.or.space.prefix * * }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% note\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.note}\r
-{ note empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- punct.period 'this.status.punct :=\r
- note #1 #1 substring$\r
- duplicate$ "{" =\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { status.cap\r
- { "u" }\r
- { "l" }\r
- if$\r
- change.case$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% patent\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.patent.date}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- year empty$\r
- { monthfiled duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "monthfiled" bibinfo.check pop$ "" }\r
- { "monthfiled" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$\r
- dayfiled duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "dayfiled" bibinfo.check pop$ "" * }\r
- { "dayfiled" bibinfo.check \r
- monthfiled empty$ \r
- { "dayfiled without a monthfiled in " cite$ * warning$\r
- * \r
- }\r
- { " " swap$ * * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- yearfiled empty$\r
- { "no year or yearfiled in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- { yearfiled "yearfiled" bibinfo.check \r
- swap$\r
- duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ }\r
- { ", " * swap$ * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { month duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "month" bibinfo.check pop$ "" }\r
- { "month" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$\r
- day duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "day" bibinfo.check pop$ "" * }\r
- { "day" bibinfo.check \r
- month empty$ \r
- { "day without a month in " cite$ * warning$\r
- * \r
- }\r
- { " " swap$ * * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- year "year" bibinfo.check \r
- swap$\r
- duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ }\r
- { ", " * swap$ * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.patent.nationality.type.number}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- nationality duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "nationality" bibinfo.warn pop$ "" }\r
- { "nationality" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ "l" change.case$ "united states" =\r
- { pop$ bbl.patentUS }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- " " *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- type empty$\r
- { bbl.patent "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- { type "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$ \r
- *\r
- number duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "number" bibinfo.warn pop$ }\r
- { "number" bibinfo.check\r
- large.number.separate\r
- swap$ " " * swap$ *\r
- }\r
- if$ \r
- cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% standard\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.organization.institution.standard.type.number}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- organization duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ \r
- institution duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "institution" bibinfo.warn }\r
- { "institution" bibinfo.warn " " * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { "organization" bibinfo.warn " " * }\r
- if$\r
- type empty$\r
- { bbl.standard "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- { type "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$ \r
- *\r
- number duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "number" bibinfo.check pop$ }\r
- { "number" bibinfo.check\r
- large.number.separate\r
- swap$ " " * swap$ *\r
- }\r
- if$ \r
- cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.revision}\r
-{ revision empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- bbl.revision\r
- revision tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "revision" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-%% thesis\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.master.thesis.type}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type empty$\r
- {\r
- bbl.mthesis\r
- }\r
- { \r
- type "type" bibinfo.check\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.phd.thesis.type}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type empty$\r
- {\r
- bbl.phdthesis\r
- }\r
- { \r
- type "type" bibinfo.check\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% URL\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.url}\r
-{ url empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
- name.url.prefix " " *\r
- "\url{" * url * "}" *\r
- punct.no 'this.status.punct :=\r
- punct.period 'prev.status.punct :=\r
- space.normal 'this.status.space :=\r
- space.normal 'prev.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'this.status.quote :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% ENTRY HANDLERS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-\r
-% Note: In many journals, IEEE (or the authors) tend not to show the number\r
-% for articles, so the display of the number is controlled here by the\r
-% switch "is.use.number.for.article"\r
-FUNCTION {article}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.journal "journal" bibinfo.check "journal" output.warn\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number.if.use.for.article output\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {book}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- author empty$\r
- { format.editors "author and editor" output.warn }\r
- { format.authors output.nonnull }\r
- if$\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title.edition output\r
- format.series output\r
- author empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { format.editors output }\r
- if$\r
- format.address.publisher.date output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {booklet}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {electronic}\r
-{ std.status.using.period\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title.electronic output\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- format.date.electronic output\r
- fin.entry\r
- empty.entry.warn\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {inbook}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- author empty$\r
- { format.editors "author and editor" output.warn }\r
- { format.authors output.nonnull }\r
- if$\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title.edition output\r
- format.series output\r
- format.address.publisher.date output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- format.chapter output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {incollection}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.in.booktitle.edition "booktitle" output.warn\r
- format.series output\r
- format.editors output\r
- format.address.publisher.date.nowarn output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- format.chapter output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {inproceedings}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.in.booktitle "booktitle" output.warn\r
- format.series output\r
- format.editors output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- publisher empty$\r
- { format.address.organization.date output }\r
- { format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address.publisher.date output\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- format.paper output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {manual}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title.edition "title" output.warn\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output \r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {mastersthesis}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.master.thesis.type output.nonnull\r
- format.school "school" bibinfo.warn output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {misc}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title output\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output \r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- empty.entry.warn\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {patent}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title output\r
- format.patent.nationality.type.number output\r
- format.patent.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- empty.entry.warn\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {periodical}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.editors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.series output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {phdthesis}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.phd.thesis.type output.nonnull\r
- format.school "school" bibinfo.warn output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {proceedings}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.editors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.series output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- publisher empty$\r
- { format.address.organization.date output }\r
- { format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address.publisher.date output\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {standard}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output \r
- format.organization.institution.standard.type.number output\r
- format.revision output\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {techreport}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output \r
- format.institution "institution" bibinfo.warn output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.tech.report.number output.nonnull\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {unpublished}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note "note" output.warn\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% The special entry type which provides the user interface to the\r
-% BST controls\r
-FUNCTION {IEEEtranBSTCTL}\r
-{ is.print.banners.to.terminal\r
- { "** IEEEtran BST control entry " quote$ * cite$ * quote$ * " detected." *\r
- top$\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- CTLuse_article_number\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLuse_article_number\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.use.number.for.article :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLuse_paper\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLuse_paper\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.use.paper :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLuse_forced_etal\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLuse_forced_etal\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.forced.et.al :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLmax_names_forced_etal\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLmax_names_forced_etal\r
- string.to.integer\r
- 'max.num.names.before.forced.et.al :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLnames_show_etal\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLnames_show_etal\r
- string.to.integer\r
- 'num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLuse_alt_spacing\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLuse_alt_spacing\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.use.alt.interword.spacing :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLalt_stretch_factor\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLalt_stretch_factor\r
- 'ALTinterwordstretchfactor :=\r
- "\renewcommand{\BIBentryALTinterwordstretchfactor}{"\r
- ALTinterwordstretchfactor * "}" *\r
- write$ newline$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLdash_repeated_names\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLdash_repeated_names\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.dash.repeated.names :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLname_format_string\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLname_format_string\r
- 'name.format.string :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLname_latex_cmd\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLname_latex_cmd\r
- 'name.latex.cmd :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLname_url_prefix\r
- missing$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLname_url_prefix\r
- 'name.url.prefix :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-\r
-\r
- num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al max.num.names.before.forced.et.al >\r
- { "CTLnames_show_etal cannot be greater than CTLmax_names_forced_etal in " cite$ * warning$ \r
- max.num.names.before.forced.et.al 'num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al :=\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% ENTRY ALIASES %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-FUNCTION {conference}{inproceedings}\r
-FUNCTION {online}{electronic}\r
-FUNCTION {internet}{electronic}\r
-FUNCTION {webpage}{electronic}\r
-FUNCTION {www}{electronic}\r
-FUNCTION {default.type}{misc}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% MAIN PROGRAM %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-READ\r
-\r
-EXECUTE {initialize.controls}\r
-EXECUTE {initialize.status.constants}\r
-EXECUTE {banner.message}\r
-\r
-EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label}\r
-ITERATE {longest.label.pass}\r
-\r
-EXECUTE {begin.bib}\r
-ITERATE {call.type$}\r
-EXECUTE {end.bib}\r
-\r
-EXECUTE{completed.message}\r
-\r
-\r
-%% That's all folks, mds.\r
-\r
+++ /dev/null
-%%\r
-%% IEEEtran.cls 2011/11/03 version V1.8 based on\r
-%% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a\r
-%% The changes in V1.8 are made with a single goal in mind:\r
-%% to change the look of the output using the [conference] option\r
-%% and the default font size (10pt) to match the Word template more closely.\r
-%% These changes may well have undesired side effects when other options\r
-%% are in force!\r
-%% \r
-%% \r
-%% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of \r
-%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and\r
-%% conferences.\r
-%% \r
-%% Support sites:\r
-%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/\r
-%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/\r
-%% and\r
-%% http://www.ieee.org/\r
-%%\r
-%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes\r
-%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version.\r
-%%\r
-%%\r
-%% Contributors:\r
-%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993),\r
-%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996),\r
-%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007)\r
-%% \r
-%% \r
-%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, \r
-%% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter,\r
-%% Juergen von Hagen\r
-%% and\r
-%% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell\r
-%%\r
-%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell\r
-%% See:\r
-%% http://www.michaelshell.org/\r
-%% for current contact information.\r
-%%\r
-%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau\r
-%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command \r
-%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. \r
-%% \r
-%%*************************************************************************\r
-%% Legal Notice:\r
-%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or\r
-%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or\r
-%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! \r
-%% User assumes all risk.\r
-%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for\r
-%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,\r
-%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse\r
-%% of any information contained here.\r
-%%\r
-%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not\r
-%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.\r
-%%\r
-%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)\r
-%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,\r
-%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included\r
-%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released\r
-%% 2003/12/01 or later.\r
-%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.\r
-%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **\r
-%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **\r
-%%\r
-%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,\r
-%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex\r
-%% \r
-%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an \r
-%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will \r
-%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA.\r
-%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version\r
-%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls".\r
-%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user,\r
-%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the\r
-%% correct version information.\r
-%% The changes should also be documented via source comments.\r
-%%*************************************************************************\r
-%%\r
-%\r
-% Available class options \r
-% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} \r
-% \r
-% *** choose only one from each category ***\r
-%\r
-% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt\r
-% Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt.\r
-% \r
-% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca\r
-% determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers,\r
-% correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user\r
-% should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like\r
-% journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for\r
-% anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is\r
-% repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review\r
-% papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will\r
-% automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the\r
-% cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are\r
-% not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like\r
-% peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted\r
-% as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact\r
-% information can be easily seen on the cover page.\r
-% The default is journal.\r
-%\r
-% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final\r
-% determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for\r
-% handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version.\r
-% draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX\r
-% packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows\r
-% for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like\r
-% draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot\r
-% of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably\r
-% also want to select onecolumn.\r
-% The default is final.\r
-%\r
-% letterpaper, a4paper\r
-% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER\r
-% SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS\r
-% WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will\r
-% have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer\r
-% bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top\r
-% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. \r
-% For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in)\r
-% paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing \r
-% (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document.\r
-% Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins.\r
-% IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex \r
-% (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more\r
-% important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for\r
-% dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the\r
-% testflow documentation\r
-% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow\r
-% for more details on dvips paper size configuration.\r
-% The default is letterpaper.\r
-%\r
-% oneside, twoside\r
-% determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex)\r
-% printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of\r
-% the pages.\r
-% The default is oneside.\r
-%\r
-% onecolumn, twocolumn\r
-% determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One\r
-% column mode is usually used only with draft papers.\r
-% The default is twocolumn.\r
-%\r
-% compsoc\r
-% Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society.\r
-%\r
-% romanappendices\r
-% Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls\r
-% now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what\r
-% v1.6b and earlier did.\r
-%\r
-% captionsoff\r
-% disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals\r
-% request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages\r
-% of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat\r
-% package can be used with this class option to achieve this format.\r
-%\r
-% nofonttune\r
-% turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those\r
-% not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned"\r
-% their fonts.\r
-% The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters.\r
-%\r
-%\r
-%----------\r
-% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted):\r
-% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\r
-% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\r
-% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\r
-% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\r
-% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\r
-%\r
-% Available CLASSINFOs provided:\r
-% \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional)\r
-% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro)\r
-% \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro)\r
-% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length)\r
-% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length)\r
-%\r
-% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided:\r
-% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted,\r
-% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff\r
-% point size options provided as a single macro:\r
-% \CLASSOPTIONpt\r
-% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's\r
-% normalsize point size.\r
-% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview\r
-% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2012/11/21 V1.8c by Harald Hanche-Olsen and Anders Christensen]\r
-\typeout{-- Based on V1.7a by Michael Shell}\r
-\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.}\r
-\typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/}\r
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
-\r
-% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3\r
-% These values serve as a way a .tex file can\r
-% determine if the new features are provided.\r
-% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from \r
-% these values. i.e., V1.4\r
-% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that-\r
-% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here)\r
-\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1}\r
-\def\IEEEtransversionminor{7}\r
-\r
-% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls\r
-\newif\if@restonecol\r
-\newif\if@titlepage\r
-\r
-\r
-% class option conditionals\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\r
-\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse\r
-\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse\r
-\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse\r
-\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse\r
-\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse\r
-\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse\r
-\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse\r
-\r
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse\r
-\r
-\r
-% class info conditionals\r
-\r
-% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output\r
-\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper\r
-\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers\r
-% dimen\r
-\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\r
-\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\r
-% count\r
-\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\r
-\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\r
-% token list\r
-\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\r
-\r
-% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs)\r
-% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some\r
-% external packages\r
-\def\@ptsize{0}\r
-% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt\r
-\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}}\r
-\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}}\r
-\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}}\r
-\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%\r
- \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%\r
- \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse\r
- \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}%\r
- \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}%\r
- \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%\r
- \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%\r
- \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue\r
- \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}%\r
- \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}%\r
- \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}}\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse\r
- \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse}\r
-\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue\r
- \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse}\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse}\r
-\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse}\r
-\r
-% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages\r
-% will go into draft mode.\r
-\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue\r
- \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} \r
-% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages\r
-% used by the document.\r
-\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue\r
- \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} \r
-% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer.\r
-\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue\r
- \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} \r
-\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse\r
- \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse\r
- \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse\r
- \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse\r
- \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue}\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse\r
- \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue\r
- \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue}\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue}\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue}\r
-\r
-\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue}\r
-\r
-\r
-% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal\r
-\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal}\r
-% overrride these defaults per user requests\r
-\ProcessOptions\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% Computer Society conditional execution command\r
-\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}\r
-% inverse\r
-\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}\r
-% compsoc conference\r
-\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}\r
-% compsoc not conference\r
-\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}\r
-\r
-\r
-% IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times.\r
-% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package.\r
-\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv}\r
-\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}\r
-\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr}\r
-\r
-\@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}}\r
-\r
-% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font,\r
-% not Times Roman.\r
-\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}}\r
-\r
-% enable Times/Palatino main text font\r
-\normalfont\selectfont\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.7 conference notice message hook\r
-\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}%\r
-\typeout{** Conference Paper **}%\r
-\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}%\r
-\typeout{}%\r
-\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}%\r
-\typeout{ of your paper;}%\r
-\typeout{}%\r
-\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}%\r
-\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}%\r
-\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}%\r
-\typeout{}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% we can send console reminder messages to the user here\r
-\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else%\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else%\r
- \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}%\r
- \fi%\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.7 improved paper size setting code.\r
-% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that\r
-% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered,\r
-% even if only effect is to set them to \relax.\r
-% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special\r
-{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{%\r
-% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax\r
-% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput\r
-% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput.\r
-\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth\r
-\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}%\r
-% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special\r
-\ifcase\pdfoutput\r
-\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}%\r
-\else\r
-% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag\r
-\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue\r
-\fi}}\r
-\r
-% let the user know the selected papersize\r
-\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space\r
-(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.}\r
-\r
-\ifCLASSINFOpdf\r
-\typeout{-- Using PDF output.}\r
-\else\r
-\typeout{-- Using DVI output.}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{}\r
-% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{},\r
-% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc.\r
-% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as\r
-% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues\r
-% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}.\r
-% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion.\r
-%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}}\r
-%\def\@journal{}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% pointsize values\r
-% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size\r
-\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9}\r
-\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10}\r
-\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11}\r
-\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) \r
-% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and\r
-% revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems\r
-% on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want\r
-% normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading)\r
-% 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down)\r
-% 10pt 58 12pt (exact)\r
-% 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down)\r
-% 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact)\r
-%\r
-\r
-% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size\r
-% in case baselinestretch ever changes.\r
-% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink\r
-\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\r
-\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip\r
-\r
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\r
-\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.}\r
-\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}%\r
-\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}%\r
-\normalsize\r
-\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt%\r
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%\r
-\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt%\r
-\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt\r
-\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}}\r
-\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}\r
-\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}\r
-\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}\r
-% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt\r
-\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}}\r
-\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}}\r
-\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}}\r
-\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}}\r
-\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}}\r
-\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% Check if we have selected 10 points\r
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\r
-\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.}\r
-\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{11}}%\r
-\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11pt}%\r
-\normalsize\r
-\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt%\r
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%\r
-\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt%\r
-\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt\r
-\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}}\r
-\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}\r
-\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}\r
-\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}\r
-% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt\r
-\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}}\r
-\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}\r
-\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}\r
-\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}\r
-\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}\r
-\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% Check if we have selected 11 points\r
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\r
-\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.}\r
-\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}%\r
-\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}%\r
-\normalsize\r
-\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt%\r
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%\r
-\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt%\r
-\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt\r
-\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}\r
-\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}\r
-\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}\r
-\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}\r
-% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt\r
-\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}}\r
-\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}\r
-\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}\r
-\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}\r
-\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}\r
-\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% Check if we have selected 12 points\r
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\r
-\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.}\r
-\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}%\r
-\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}%\r
-\normalsize\r
-\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt%\r
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%\r
-\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt%\r
-\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt\r
-\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}\r
-\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}\r
-\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}\r
-\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}\r
-% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt\r
-\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}}\r
-\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}}\r
-\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}}\r
-\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}}\r
-\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}}\r
-\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for\r
-% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution\r
-% tolerance to turn off this warning\r
-\def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt}\r
-% However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed.\r
-\r
-\r
-% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with\r
-% technote\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%\r
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else%\r
- \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}%\r
- \fi%\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.7\r
-% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with\r
-% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use\r
-% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts.\r
-\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family\r
-\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family\r
-\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family\r
-\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family\r
-\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family\r
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode\r
-\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else\r
-\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else\r
-\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else\r
-\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else\r
-\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else\r
-\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% set the default \baselinestretch\r
-\def\baselinestretch{1}\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\r
- \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes\r
-\fi \r
-\r
-\r
-% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch\r
-\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined\r
-\else\r
- \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override\r
- \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to\r
- \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% store the normalsize baselineskip\r
-\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip\r
-\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax\r
-% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip\r
-% we could save a register by giving the user access to\r
-% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect\r
-% its read only internal status\r
-\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\r
-\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax\r
-% store the nominal value of jot\r
-\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot\r
-\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax\r
-\r
-% set \jot\r
-\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing\r
-% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a\r
-% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em)\r
-% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%.\r
-% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of:\r
-% \r
-% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt\r
-% \r
-% However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need\r
-% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE\r
-% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words.\r
-% IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be:\r
-% 35% nominal\r
-% 23% minimum\r
-% 50% maximum\r
-% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.)\r
-% \r
-% for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more:\r
-% 37.5% nominal\r
-% 23% minimum\r
-% 55% maximum\r
-\r
-% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use\r
-% for medium (normal weight)\r
-\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35}\r
-\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23}\r
-\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50}\r
-\r
-% for bold\r
-\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375}\r
-\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23}\r
-\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55}\r
-\r
-\r
-% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX:\r
-% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space\r
-% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch\r
-% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink\r
-% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands\r
-% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes\r
-\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{%\r
-\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead.\r
-\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%\r
-\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax\r
-\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%\r
-\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax\r
-\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%\r
-\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%\r
-\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}}\r
-\r
-% revise the interword spacing for each font weight\r
-\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%\r
-\mdseries\r
-\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}%\r
-\bfseries\r
-\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}%\r
-}}\r
-\r
-% revise the interword spacing for each font shape\r
-% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are\r
-% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we\r
-% won't alter these either.\r
-\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%\r
-\normalfont\r
-\@@IEEEsetfontdimens\r
-\normalfont\itshape\r
-\@@IEEEsetfontdimens\r
-}}\r
-\r
-% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape\r
-% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a \r
-% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers.\r
-\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily\r
-\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens\r
-\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens\r
-\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens\r
-\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens\r
-\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens\r
-\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens\r
-\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens\r
-\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens\r
-\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens\r
-\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}}\r
-\r
-% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing\r
-% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make\r
-% sure all the default fonts are loaded\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\r
-\@IEEEtunefonts\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts\r
-\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.6 \r
-% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations\r
-% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise\r
-% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox\r
-% warning. The author may still have to tweak things,\r
-% but the appearance will be much better "right out\r
-% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior.\r
-% TeX default is 50\r
-\hyphenpenalty=750\r
-% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better.\r
-% The TeX default is 1000\r
-\hbadness=1350\r
-% IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation\r
-\frenchspacing\r
-\r
-% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks\r
-\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700\r
-\relpenalty=800 % default 500\r
-\r
-\r
-% margin note stuff\r
-\marginparsep 10pt\r
-\marginparwidth 20pt\r
-\marginparpush 25pt\r
-\r
-\r
-% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch\r
-\lineskip 0pt\r
-\normallineskip 0pt\r
-\lineskiplimit 0pt\r
-\normallineskiplimit 0pt\r
-\r
-% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the\r
-% footline\r
-\footskip 0.4in\r
-\r
-% normally zero, should be relative to font height.\r
-% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes)\r
-\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\r
-\parskip 6pt plus 2pt minus 1pt\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\parindent 1.0em\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\r
-\parindent 14.45pt\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\topmargin -49.0pt\r
-\headheight 12pt\r
-\headsep 0.25in\r
-\r
-% use the normal font baselineskip\r
-% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch\r
-\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\r
-\textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt\r
-% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.\r
-% The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used \r
-% to determine these values.\r
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 63 lines/page\r
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page\r
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 52 lines/page\r
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page\r
-\r
-\r
-\columnsep 1.5pc\r
-\textwidth 184.2mm\r
- \r
-\r
-% the default side margins are equal\r
-\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \r
-\oddsidemargin 14.32mm\r
-\evensidemargin 14.32mm\r
-\else\r
-\oddsidemargin 0.680in\r
-\evensidemargin 0.680in\r
-\fi\r
-% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset\r
-\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}\r
-\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% adjust margins for conference mode\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\r
- \topmargin -0.25in\r
- % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers\r
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}\r
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}\r
- \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt)\r
- % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.\r
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 61 lines/page\r
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=62\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 62 lines/page\r
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page\r
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% compsoc conference\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\r
- % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep\r
- \columnsep 0.375in\r
- % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin\r
- \topmargin 0in\r
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff\r
- % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers\r
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}\r
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}\r
- \textheight 8.875in % (641.39625pt)\r
- % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.\r
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page\r
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=53\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 53 lines/page\r
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page\r
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 46 lines/page \r
- \textwidth 6.5in\r
- % the default side margins are equal\r
- \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \r
- \oddsidemargin 22.45mm\r
- \evensidemargin 22.45mm\r
- \else\r
- \oddsidemargin 1in\r
- \evensidemargin 1in\r
- \fi\r
- % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset\r
- \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}\r
- \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}\r
-\fi\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% draft mode settings override that of all other modes\r
-% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra\r
-% space between the lines for editor's comments\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \r
- % want 1in from top of paper to text\r
- \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}%\r
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}%\r
- % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type\r
- \oddsidemargin 0in\r
- \evensidemargin 0in\r
- % set the text width\r
- \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}%\r
- \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}%\r
- \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}%\r
- \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}%\r
- % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines.\r
- % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad\r
- \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}%\r
- \divide\textheight by \baselineskip%\r
- \multiply\textheight by \baselineskip%\r
- \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}%\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin\r
-% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner.\r
-\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined\r
-\else\r
- \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined\r
- \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}\r
- \fi\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined\r
-\else\r
- % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer.\r
- \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined\r
- \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}\r
- \fi\r
- \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\r
- \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}\r
- \else\r
- \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}\r
- \fi\r
- \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}\r
- \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}\r
- \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}\r
- \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}\r
- \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}\r
- \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and \r
- outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin\r
-% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin\r
-\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined\r
-\else\r
- \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined\r
- \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}\r
- \fi\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined\r
-\else\r
- % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin\r
- \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined\r
- \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}\r
- \fi\r
- \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}\r
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in}\r
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}\r
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}\r
- \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}\r
- \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}\r
- \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}\r
- % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip\r
- % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need\r
- % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will\r
- % correct for both.\r
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\r
- \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and \r
- bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% LIST SPACING CONTROLS\r
-\r
-% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing\r
-% above and below \trivlist \r
-% Both \list and IED lists override this.\r
-% However, \trivlist will use this as will most\r
-% things built from \trivlist like the \center\r
-% environment.\r
-\topsep 0.5\baselineskip\r
-\r
-% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded\r
-% or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase\r
-% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero.\r
-% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster.\r
-\partopsep \z@\r
-\r
-% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. \r
-% IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs\r
-% so this is also zero. \r
-% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to\r
-% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists).\r
-\parsep \z@\r
-\r
-% Controls the extra spacing between list items. \r
-% IEEE does not put extra spacing between items.\r
-% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect\r
-% lists (but not IED lists).\r
-\itemsep \z@\r
-\r
-% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list\r
-% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter\r
-% it, you have to do so when you call the \list.\r
-% However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment\r
-% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below\r
-\itemindent -1em\r
-\r
-% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to\r
-% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list.\r
-% Hence this statement does nothing for lists.\r
-% But, quote and verse do use it for indention.\r
-\leftmargin 2em\r
-\r
-% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list\r
-% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and\r
-% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they\r
-% all are overridden.\r
-\leftmargini 2em\r
-%\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used.\r
-%\leftmargini 0em\r
-\leftmarginii 1em\r
-\leftmarginiii 1.5em\r
-\leftmarginiv 1.5em\r
-\leftmarginv 1.0em\r
-\leftmarginvi 1.0em\r
-\labelsep 0.5em \r
-\labelwidth \z@\r
-\r
-\r
-% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained.\r
-% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the\r
-% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the\r
-% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). \r
-% \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around\r
-% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list.\r
-% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in \r
-% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes\r
-% of these values DO affect \list\r
-% \r
-\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}\r
-\let\@listI\@listi\r
-\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii%\r
- \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}\r
-\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii%\r
- \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}\r
-\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv%\r
- \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}\r
-\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv%\r
- \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}\r
-\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi%\r
- \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}\r
-\r
-\r
-% IEEE uses 5) not 5.\r
-\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}\r
-\r
-% IEEE uses a) not (a)\r
-\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}\r
-\r
-% IEEE uses iii) not iii.\r
-\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}\r
-\r
-% IEEE uses A) not A.\r
-\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}\r
-\r
-% exactly the same as in article.cls\r
-\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}\r
-\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}\r
-\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}\r
-\r
-% itemized list label styles\r
-\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}\r
-\def\labelitemii{$\circ$}\r
-\def\labelitemiii{\vrule height 0.8ex depth -0.2ex width 0.6ex}\r
-\def\labelitemiv{$\ast$}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS ****\r
-% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls\r
-% ***************************\r
-% \r
-% \r
-% IEEE seems to use at least two different values by\r
-% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right\r
-% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal\r
-% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use\r
-% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications\r
-% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent.\r
-% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose \r
-% which one you like in your document using a command such as:\r
-% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB}\r
-\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA\r
-\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent\r
-\r
-\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB\r
-\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent\r
-% However, we'll default to using \parindent\r
-% which makes more sense to me\r
-\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent\r
-\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA\r
-\r
-\r
-% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels\r
-% are indented to the right.\r
-% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention\r
-\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent\r
-\IEEEelabelindent \parindent\r
-\r
-% This controls the default amount the description list labels\r
-% are indented to the right.\r
-% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention\r
-\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent\r
-\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent\r
-\r
-% This is the value actually used within the IED lists.\r
-% The IED environments automatically set its value to\r
-% one of the three values above, so global changes do \r
-% not have any effect\r
-\newdimen\IEEElabelindent\r
-\IEEElabelindent \parindent\r
-\r
-% The actual amount labels will be indented is\r
-% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below\r
-% corresponding to the level of nesting depth\r
-% This provides a means by which the user can\r
-% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper\r
-% levels\r
-% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE"\r
-% values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific\r
-% circumstances.\r
-% The first list level almost always has full indention.\r
-% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation\r
-% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing\r
-% that they don't use any indentation.\r
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one\r
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases\r
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0?\r
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0}\r
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0}\r
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0}\r
-\r
-% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto\r
-% set to one of the 6 values above\r
-% global changes here have no effect\r
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0}\r
-\r
-% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED\r
-% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for\r
-% the labels.\r
-\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep\r
-\IEEEiednormlabelsep \parindent\r
-\r
-% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED\r
-% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for\r
-% the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the \r
-% spacing in these cases\r
-\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep\r
-\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em\r
-\r
-% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and\r
-% below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing\r
-% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable.\r
-\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep\r
-\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt\r
-\r
-\r
-% This command is executed within each IED list environment\r
-% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the \r
-% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing \r
-% global parameters that affect things other than lists.\r
-% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}}\r
-% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until \r
-% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. \r
-\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax}\r
-\r
-% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based\r
-% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent\r
-% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label}\r
-% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively:\r
-% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep\r
-% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %\r
-\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}%\r
-\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%\r
-\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}}\r
-\r
-% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the\r
-% width of the given text. It is the same as\r
-% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text}\r
-% and useful as a shorter alternative.\r
-% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width\r
-% of the longest label in the list\r
-\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}}\r
-\r
-% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the \r
-% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal\r
-% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via\r
-% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list\r
-% environments.\r
-\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}}\r
-\r
-% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically\r
-% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep\r
-% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin\r
-% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) \r
-% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list\r
-% environments to have an effect.\r
-\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\r
-\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse\r
-\r
-% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by\r
-% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level.\r
-% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option \r
-% of the IED list environments to have an effect.\r
-\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\r
-\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse\r
-\r
-\r
-% internal variable to indicate type of IED label\r
-% justification\r
-% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right\r
-\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}\r
-\r
-\r
-% commands to allow the user to control IED\r
-% label justifications. Use these commands within\r
-% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl\r
-% Note that changing the normal list justifications\r
-% is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so!\r
-% I include these commands as they may be helpful to\r
-% those who are using these enhanced list controls for\r
-% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work.\r
-% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right\r
-% justification, description defaults to left.\r
-\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left\r
-\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center\r
-\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies\r
-% this allows us to set all the list parameters within\r
-% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) \r
-% from overriding any of our parameters\r
-% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers\r
-% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %\r
-\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}}\r
-\r
-% Note controlled spacing here\r
-\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax%\r
-\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax%\r
-\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax%\r
-\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax%\r
-\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax%\r
-\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax%\r
-\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax%\r
-\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax%\r
-\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax%\r
-\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax}\r
-\r
-\r
-% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments\r
-% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description\r
-% which must be created by the base classes\r
-% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate\r
-\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize\r
-\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize\r
-\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate\r
-\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate\r
-\r
-% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls\r
-\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription}\r
- {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin\r
- \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}\r
- {\endlist}\r
-\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep\r
- \normalfont\bfseries #1}\r
-\r
-\r
-% override LaTeX's default IED lists\r
-\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize}\r
-\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize}\r
-\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}\r
-\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}\r
-\def\description{\@IEEEdescription}\r
-\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription}\r
-\r
-% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that\r
-% override itemize, enumerate, or description\r
-\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize}\r
-\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize}\r
-\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}\r
-\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}\r
-\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription}\r
-\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription}\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal\r
-% commands so they are protected against redefinition\r
-\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}}\r
-\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}}\r
-\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}}\r
-\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist}\r
-\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist}\r
-\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist}\r
-\r
-\r
-% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS\r
-% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS\r
-% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001\r
-% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %\r
-\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{%\r
- \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%\r
- \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%\r
- \advance\@itemdepth\@ne%\r
- \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%\r
- % get the labelindentfactor for this level\r
- \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be\r
- \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%\r
- \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment\r
- \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default\r
- % set other defaults\r
- \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%\r
- \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%\r
- \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%\r
- \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent%\r
- \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%\r
- \partopsep 0ex%\r
- \parsep 0ex%\r
- \itemsep \parskip%\r
- \rightmargin 0em%\r
- \listparindent 0em%\r
- \itemindent 0em%\r
- % calculate the label width\r
- % the user can override this later if\r
- % they specified a \labelwidth\r
- \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}%\r
- \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters\r
- \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{%\r
- \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes\r
- % to our globals\r
- \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel\r
- \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters\r
- #1\relax%\r
- % If the user has requested not to use the\r
- % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent\r
- \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%\r
- \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent%\r
- \fi%\r
- % Unless the user has requested otherwise,\r
- % calculate our left margin based\r
- % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and\r
- % \labelsep\r
- \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%\r
- \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%\r
- \fi}\fi\fi}%\r
-\r
-\r
-% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS\r
-% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS\r
-% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001\r
-% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %\r
-\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{%\r
- \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%\r
- \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%\r
- \advance\@enumdepth\@ne%\r
- \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%\r
- % get the labelindentfactor for this level\r
- \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be\r
- \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%\r
- \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment\r
- \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default\r
- % set other defaults\r
- \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%\r
- \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%\r
- \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%\r
- \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent%\r
- \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%\r
- \partopsep 0ex%\r
- \parsep 0ex%\r
- \itemsep 0ex%\r
- \rightmargin 0em%\r
- \listparindent 0em%\r
- \itemindent 0em%\r
- % calculate the label width\r
- % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using\r
- % normalfont 1) to 9)\r
- % The user can override this later\r
- \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}%\r
- \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters\r
- \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}%\r
- \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes\r
- % to our globals\r
- \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel\r
- \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters \r
- #1\relax%\r
- % If the user has requested not to use the\r
- % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent\r
- \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%\r
- \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%\r
- \fi%\r
- % Unless the user has requested otherwise,\r
- % calculate our left margin based\r
- % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and\r
- % \labelsep\r
- \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%\r
- \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%\r
- \fi}\fi\fi}%\r
-\r
-\r
-% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS\r
-% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS\r
-% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001\r
-% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %\r
-\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{%\r
- \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%\r
- % get the labelindentfactor for this level\r
- \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be\r
- \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%\r
- \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment\r
- \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default\r
- % set other defaults\r
- \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%\r
- \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%\r
- \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% \r
- \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent%\r
- % assume normal labelsep\r
- \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%\r
- \partopsep 0ex%\r
- \parsep 0ex%\r
- \itemsep 0ex%\r
- \rightmargin 0em%\r
- \listparindent 0em%\r
- \itemindent 0em%\r
- % Bogus label width in case the user forgets\r
- % to set it.\r
- % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you\r
- % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to \r
- % display it on the screen during compilation \r
- % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out\r
- % which label is the widest)\r
- \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}%\r
- \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters\r
- \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes\r
- % to our globals\r
- \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel\r
- \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters \r
- #1\relax%\r
- % If the user has requested not to use the\r
- % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent\r
- \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%\r
- \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%\r
- \fi%\r
- % Unless the user has requested otherwise,\r
- % calculate our left margin based\r
- % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and\r
- % \labelsep\r
- \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%\r
- \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax%\r
- \fi}\fi}\r
-\r
-% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed.\r
-\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax\r
-\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else\r
-\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax\r
-\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else\r
-\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% VERSE and QUOTE\r
-% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment\r
-\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr\r
- \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent\r
- \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax}\r
- {\endlist}\r
-\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent\r
- \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax}\r
- {\endlist}\r
-\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax}\r
- {\endlist}\r
-\r
-\r
-% \titlepage\r
-% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct\r
-% way to create the title page. \r
-\newif\if@restonecol\r
-\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\r
- \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@}\r
-\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}\r
-\r
-% standard values from article.cls\r
-\arraycolsep 5pt\r
-\arrayrulewidth .4pt\r
-\doublerulesep 2pt\r
-\r
-\tabcolsep 6pt\r
-\tabbingsep 0.5em\r
-\r
-\r
-%% FOOTNOTES\r
-%\r
-%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt\r
-% V1.6 respond to changes in font size\r
-% space added above the footnotes (if present)\r
-\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip\r
-\r
-% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes\r
-% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in\r
-% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep\r
-% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed\r
-% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since\r
-% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip\r
-% above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to\r
-% use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing\r
-% between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad\r
-% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps\r
-% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran\r
-% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle.\r
-{\footnotesize\r
-\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip}\r
-\r
-\def\unnumberedfootnote{\gdef\@thefnmark{\quad}\@footnotetext}\r
-\r
-\skip\@mpfootins 0.3\baselineskip\r
-\fboxsep = 3pt\r
-\fboxrule = .4pt\r
-% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark\r
-% Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need\r
-% box resizing tricks here.\r
-%\long\def\@makefnmark{\scriptsize\normalfont\@thefnmark}\r
-\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em\r
-\long\def\@maketablefntext#1{\raggedleft\leavevmode\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}\r
-% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }}\r
-\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% IEEE does not use footnote rules. Or do they?\r
-\def\footnoterule{\vskip-2pt \hrule height 0.6pt depth \z@ \vskip1.6pt\relax}\r
-\toks@\expandafter{\@setminipage\let\footnoterule\relax\footnotesep\z@}\r
-\edef\@setminipage{\the\toks@}\r
-\r
-% V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot"\r
-% system to implement this.\r
-\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule\r
-\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule\r
-\kern-5pt\r
-\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill}\r
-\kern4.6pt\r
-\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse\r
-\else\r
-\relax\r
-\fi}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages\r
-\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000\r
-\r
-% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations\r
-% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000,\r
-% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100.\r
-\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500\r
-\r
-% default allows section depth up to /paragraph\r
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}\r
-\r
-% technotes do not allow /paragraph\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\r
- \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}\r
-\fi\r
-% neither do compsoc conferences\r
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\newcounter{section}\r
-\newcounter{subsection}[section]\r
-\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]\r
-\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]\r
-\r
-% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may\r
-% have their own, different, implementations\r
-\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation]\r
-\r
-% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents\r
-\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1\r
-\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray)\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-% compsoc is all arabic\r
-\def\thesection{\arabic{section}} \r
-\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}\r
-\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}\r
-\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}\r
-\else\r
-\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I\r
-% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - \r
-\def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A\r
-% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1\r
-\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1\r
-\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to\r
-% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks.\r
-% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but\r
-% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions.\r
-\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}%\r
-\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax}\r
-\r
-\r
-% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings)\r
-% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes\r
-% in the former to automatically appear in the latter\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference\r
- \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}\r
- \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.}\r
- \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.}\r
- \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.}\r
- \else% compsoc not conferencs\r
- \def\thesectiondis{\thesection}\r
- \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}}\r
- \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}}\r
- \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}}\r
- \fi\r
-\else% not compsoc\r
- \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I.\r
- \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B.\r
- \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3)\r
- \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d)\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum\r
-\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1)\r
-% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray\r
-\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a)\r
-% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on\r
-% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis\r
-\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does\r
-\def\contentsname{Contents}\r
-\def\listfigurename{List of Figures}\r
-\def\listtablename{List of Tables}\r
-\def\refname{References}\r
-\def\indexname{Index}\r
-\def\figurename{Figure}\r
-\def\tablename{TABLE}\r
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}}\r
-\def\partname{Part}\r
-\def\appendixname{Appendix}\r
-\def\abstractname{Abstract}\r
-% IEEE specific names\r
-\def\IEEEkeywordsname{Keywords}\r
-\def\IEEEproofname{Proof}\r
-\r
-\r
-% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS\r
-%\r
-\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}\r
-\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em}\r
-\def\@dotsep{4.5}\r
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}\r
-\r
-% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily \r
-% collide with the section titles. \r
-% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders.\r
-% MDS 1/2001\r
-\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}}\r
-\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}%\r
- \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth%\r
- \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par%\r
- \endgroup}\r
-% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep\r
-\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}}\r
-\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}}\r
-% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth\r
-% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents\r
-% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are!\r
-\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}}\r
-\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}}\r
-\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}}\r
-\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}}\r
-\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}}\r
-\let\l@table\l@figure\r
-\r
-\r
-%% Definitions for floats\r
-%%\r
-%% Normal Floats\r
-\floatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip\r
-\textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip\r
-\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil\r
-\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil \r
-\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil\r
-\def\topfraction{0.9}\r
-\def\bottomfraction{0.4}\r
-\def\floatpagefraction{0.8}\r
-% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page\r
-\def\textfraction{0.1}\r
-\r
-%% Double Column Floats\r
-\dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip\r
-\r
-\dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip\r
-% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e.\r
-% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best\r
-% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable\r
-% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and\r
-% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with\r
-% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex\r
-% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998.\r
-% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't\r
-% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing.\r
-\r
-\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil\r
-\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil\r
-\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil\r
-\def\dbltopfraction{0.8}\r
-\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8}\r
-\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4}\r
-\r
-\intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip\r
-\setcounter{topnumber}{2}\r
-\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}\r
-\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% article class provides these, we should too.\r
-\newlength\abovecaptionskip\r
-\newlength\belowcaptionskip\r
-% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table\r
-% captions\r
-\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.65\baselineskip}\r
-\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0.75\baselineskip}\r
-% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be\r
-% overridden by a user\r
-\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%\r
-\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\belowcaptionskip\relax}%\r
-\r
-\r
-% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments\r
-% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref.\r
-\def\@IEEEtablestring{table}\r
-\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference\r
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%\r
-% test if is a for a figure or table\r
-\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%\r
-% if a table, do table caption\r
-\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}%\r
-\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace\r
-% if not a table, format it as a figure\r
-\else\r
-\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace\r
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%\r
-\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%\r
-% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around\r
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%\r
-\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%\r
-% if caption is shorter than a line, center\r
-\else%\r
-\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%\r
-\fi\fi}\r
-\else% nonconference compsoc\r
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%\r
-% test if is a for a figure or table\r
-\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%\r
-% if a table, do table caption\r
-\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}%\r
-\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace\r
-% if not a table, format it as a figure\r
-\else\r
-\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace\r
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%\r
-\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%\r
-% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around\r
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%\r
-\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%\r
-% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify\r
-\else%\r
-\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%\r
-\fi\fi}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption\r
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%\r
-% test if is a for a figure or table\r
-\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%\r
-% if a table, do table caption\r
-\footnotesize{\centering\normalfont\footnotesize#1.\qquad\scshape #2\par}%\r
-\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace\r
-% if not a table, format it as a figure\r
-\else\r
-\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace\r
-% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one\r
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ #2}%\r
-\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%\r
-% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around\r
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ }%\r
-\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%\r
-% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise\r
-\else%\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%\r
-\else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%\r
-\fi\fi\fi}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label\r
-% within \caption\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff\r
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}%\r
-\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label\r
-\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\r
-\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}%\r
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}%\r
-\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\r
-\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with\r
-% preview-latex\r
-\newcounter{figure}\r
-\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}\r
-\def\fps@figure{tbp}\r
-\def\ftype@figure{1}\r
-\def\ext@figure{lof}\r
-\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}\r
-\def\figure{\@float{figure}}\r
-\def\endfigure{\end@float}\r
-\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}}\r
-\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}\r
-\newcounter{table}\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-\def\thetable{\arabic{table}}\r
-\else\r
-\def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}\r
-\fi\r
-\def\fps@table{tbp}\r
-\def\ftype@table{2}\r
-\def\ext@table{lot}\r
-\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}\r
-% V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables\r
-% to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray\r
-\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\scriptsize\@setminipage}%\r
- \let\@makefntext\@maketablefntext\r
- \@float{table}}\r
-\def\endtable{\end@float}\r
-% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well.\r
-\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\scriptsize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}}\r
-\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%\r
-%% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS\r
-%%\r
-%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX \r
-%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, \r
-%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, \r
-%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding.\r
-%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;)\r
-\r
-\r
-% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting\r
-\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}\r
-\r
-\newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form\r
-\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\r
-\r
-\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter\r
-% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray\r
-% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both\r
-\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue\r
-\r
-\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined\r
-\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used\r
-\r
-\r
-% The default math style used by the columns\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle}\r
-% The default text style used by the columns\r
-% default to using the current font\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax}\r
-\r
-% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax}\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax}\r
-\r
-% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber\r
-% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package\r
-% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as \r
-% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else.\r
-\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue}\r
-\def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue}\r
-\def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse}\r
-\r
-\r
-\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue%\r
-\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray\r
-\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi%\r
-\def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi}\r
-\r
-% flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation\r
-\newif\if@IEEEissubequation%\r
-\@IEEEissubequationfalse\r
-\r
-% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}}\r
-\r
-% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments\r
-% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the\r
-% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text}\r
-\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}%\r
-% check if column is defined\r
-\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%\r
-\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%\r
-\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname%\r
-\else% if not, error and use default type\r
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak\r
-Using a default centering column instead}%\r
-{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%\r
-\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%\r
-\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname%\r
-\fi%\r
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it\r
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi}\r
-\r
-% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text}\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}%\r
-\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}%\r
-\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition}\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}%\r
-\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types\r
-\r
-\r
-% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list\r
-% used to build up the \halign preamble\r
-\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}%\r
-\@@IEEEappendtoksA}\r
-\r
-% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument\r
-% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register\r
-\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}%\r
-\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}%\r
-\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA}\r
-\r
-% define some common column types for the user\r
-% math\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$}\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$}\r
-% text\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{}\r
-\r
-% vertical rules\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}%\r
-{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}\r
-\r
-% horizontal rules\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil}\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil}\r
-\r
-% plain\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{}\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$}\r
-\r
-% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined\r
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}\r
-\r
-\r
-% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types)\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}\r
-% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types)\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt}\r
-\r
-% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column\r
-% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell\r
-% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way.\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness]\r
-% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. \r
-\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax}\r
-\r
-% creates a blank separator row\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands]\r
-% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]\r
-% blank arguments inherit the default values\r
-% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}}\r
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%\r
-% get the skip value, based on the font commands\r
-% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3\r
-% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes\r
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%\r
-\else%\r
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%\r
-\fi%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}\r
-\r
-% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands]\r
-% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]\r
-% blank arguments inherit the default values\r
-% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols\r
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it\r
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%\r
-\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}}\r
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%\r
-% get the skip value, based on the font commands\r
-% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3\r
-% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes\r
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%\r
-\else%\r
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%\r
-\fi%\r
-\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% draws a single rule across all the columns optional\r
-% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default\r
-% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness]\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols\r
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it\r
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%\r
-\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule \r
-% turn off any struts\r
-\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}\r
-\r
-\r
-% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then\r
-% another single rule row \r
-% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default\r
-% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols\r
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it\r
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%\r
-\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}%\r
-{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}}\r
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%\r
-% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]\r
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%\r
-\else%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax%\r
-\fi%\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%\r
-\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]%\r
-\else%\r
-\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]%\r
-\fi%\r
-\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%\r
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it\r
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%\r
-\else%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%\r
-\fi%\r
-}\r
-\r
-% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then\r
-% another single rule row \r
-% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default\r
-% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols\r
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it\r
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%\r
-\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}}\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}%\r
-{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}}\r
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%\r
-% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]\r
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%\r
-\else%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%\r
-\fi%\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%\r
-\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]%\r
-\else%\r
-\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]%\r
-\fi%\r
-\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%\r
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it\r
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%\r
-\else%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%\r
-\fi%\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% inserts a full row's worth of &'s\r
-% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns\r
-% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax%\r
-\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all\r
-\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax%\r
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%\r
-\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count\r
-\repeat%\r
-\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl\r
-\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt}\r
-\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray\r
-\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth\r
-\r
-\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax%\r
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%\r
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%\r
-% remove stretchability\r
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%\r
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%\r
-% save values\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}}\r
-\r
-% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax%\r
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax%\r
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax%\r
-% remove stretchability\r
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%\r
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%\r
-% restore values\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% globally restores the strut height and depth to the \r
-% master values and sets the master strut flag to true\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax%\r
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%\r
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%\r
-% remove stretchability\r
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%\r
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%\r
-% restore values\r
-\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%\r
-\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%\r
-\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue}\r
-\r
-\r
-% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current\r
-% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\r
-% and the use master strut flag, global\r
-% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried\r
-% into the isolation/strut column\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax%\r
-\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else%\r
-\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}%\r
-\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}%\r
-\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse%\r
-\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands]\r
-% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height\r
-% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside\r
-% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut\r
-% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut\r
-% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip\r
-% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively.\r
-% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under\r
-% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current\r
-% font is used.\r
-% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%\r
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}%\r
-\skip0=\skip3\relax%\r
-\else% arg one present\r
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}%\r
-\skip0=\skip3\relax%\r
-\fi% if null arg\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%\r
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}%\r
-\skip2=\skip3\relax%\r
-\else% arg two present\r
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}%\r
-\skip2=\skip3\relax%\r
-\fi% if null arg\r
-% remove stretchability, just to be safe\r
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%\r
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%\r
-% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth\r
-\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master\r
-\else% outer, have to set master strut too\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut\r
-\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands]\r
-% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height\r
-% and depth to both the master and local struts.\r
-% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth\r
-% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use \r
-% of the local strut values.\r
-% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead.\r
-% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under\r
-% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current\r
-% font is used.\r
-% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%\r
-\skip0=0pt\relax%\r
-\else% arg one present\r
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}%\r
-\skip0=\skip3\relax%\r
-\fi% if null arg\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%\r
-\skip2=0pt\relax%\r
-\else% arg two present\r
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}%\r
-\skip2=\skip3\relax%\r
-\fi% if null arg\r
-% remove stretchability, just to be safe\r
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%\r
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%\r
-% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth\r
-\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size\r
-% get local strut size\r
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%\r
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%\r
-% add it to the user supplied values\r
-\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%\r
-\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%\r
-% update the local strut size\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master\r
-\else% outer, have to set master strut too\r
-% get master strut size\r
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%\r
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%\r
-% add it to the user supplied values\r
-\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%\r
-\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%\r
-% update the local and master strut sizes\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut\r
-\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% allow user a way to see the struts\r
-\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts\r
-\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse\r
-\r
-% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values\r
-% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax%\r
-\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\r
-% get master strut size\r
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%\r
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%\r
-\else%\r
-% get local strut size\r
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%\r
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%\r
-\fi%\r
-% remove stretchability, probably not needed\r
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%\r
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%\r
-% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth\r
-% allow user to see struts if desired\r
-\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%\r
-\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%\r
-\else%\r
-\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray\r
-% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. \r
-% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands]\r
-% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax]\r
-% blank arguments inherit the default values\r
-% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2\r
-\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}}\r
-\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}}\r
-\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}}\r
-\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax%\r
-\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%\r
-\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax%\r
-\else%\r
-\skip0=#1\relax%\r
-\fi%\r
-\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%\r
-\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax%\r
-\else%\r
-\skip2=#2\relax%\r
-\fi%\r
-% remove stretchability, probably not needed\r
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%\r
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%\r
-\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%\r
-\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%\r
-\else%\r
-\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the\r
-% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]%\r
-\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}\r
-\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray}\r
-\r
-\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray}\r
-\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray}\r
-\r
-\r
-% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. \r
-% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row.\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols}\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}}\r
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{%\r
- % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not\r
- % the star form was involked\r
- \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\r
- \else% not the star form\r
- \global\@eqnswtrue\r
- \fi% if star form\r
- \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations\r
- \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation\r
- \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign\r
- \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default\r
- \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise\r
- \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off\r
- % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it\r
- \lineskip=0pt\relax\r
- \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax\r
- \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%\r
- \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%\r
- \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math\r
- \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, \r
- % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build\r
- \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line\r
- \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet \r
- \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label\r
- \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides\r
- #1\relax% allow user to override defaults\r
- \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers\r
- \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line\r
- \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA \r
- % put in the column for the equation number\r
- \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first\r
- \toks0={##}%\r
- % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking\r
- \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%\r
- % add the isolation column\r
- \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%\r
- % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking\r
- \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%\r
- % add the equation number col to the preamble\r
- \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}%\r
- % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col\r
- % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build\r
- \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax\r
- % begin the display alignment\r
- \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines\r
- $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup\r
- % "exspand" the preamble\r
- \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}\r
-\r
-% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use\r
-% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed,\r
-% restore counters to correct values and exit\r
-\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup%\r
-\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi%\r
-\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne%\r
-$$\@ignoretrue}\r
-\r
-% need a way to remember if last line is a subequation\r
-\newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation%\r
-\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\r
-\r
-% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to\r
-% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount]\r
-% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray\r
-% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid\r
-% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column\r
-% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column\r
- {\ifnum0=`}\fi\r
- \@ifstar{%\r
- \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR\r
- }{%\r
- \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR\r
- }%\r
-}\r
-\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip}\r
-\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{%\r
- \ifnum0=`{\fi}%\r
- \@@IEEEeqnarraycr\r
- \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}%\r
-\r
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register\r
- \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column\r
- \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\r
- \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak\r
- environment}%\r
- {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak \r
- specifications.}\relax%\r
- \else\r
- \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all\r
- \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\r
- \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%\r
- \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count\r
- \repeat\r
- % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column\r
- \fi\r
- % execute the &'s\r
- \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%\r
- % handle the strut/isolation column\r
- \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed\r
- \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray\r
- &% and enter the equation number column\r
- % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the\r
- % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was\r
- \if@eqnsw%\r
- \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}%\r
- \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue%\r
- \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter\r
- \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}%\r
- \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi%\r
- \fi%\r
- % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers\r
- \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi\r
- \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag\r
- % reset the number of columns the user actually used\r
- \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax\r
- % the real end of the line\r
- \cr}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything\r
-% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second\r
-% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray,\r
-% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested.\r
-% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox\r
-% within an hbox.\r
-% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within\r
-% a \hbox{$ $} construct.\r
-% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or \r
-% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode.\r
-% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to -\r
-% natural width is the default.\r
-% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing\r
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols}\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}\r
-\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}\r
-\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}\r
-\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}\r
-\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}\r
-\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}\r
-\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}\r
-\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}\r
-\r
-\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarraybox}\r
-\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}\r
-\r
-\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarraybox}\r
-\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}\r
-\r
-% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} \r
-% for \vcenter in non-math mode\r
-\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW%\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\r
-\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}}\r
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}}\r
-\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}}\r
-\r
-% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs\r
-\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign\r
- \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values\r
- \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default\r
- \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise\r
- \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off\r
- % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it\r
- \lineskip=0pt\relax%\r
- \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%\r
- \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%\r
- \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%\r
- \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math\r
- % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox\r
- \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue\r
- \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue\r
- \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue\r
- \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, \r
- % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build\r
- \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides\r
- #1\relax% allow user to override defaults\r
- \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing\r
- \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA\r
- % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col\r
- \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first\r
- \toks0={##}%\r
- % add the isolation column to the preamble\r
- \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% \r
- % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build\r
- \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax\r
- % begin the alignment\r
- \everycr{}%\r
- % use only the very first token to determine the positioning\r
- % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter,\r
- % but is probably not worth the effort\r
- % \noindent is used as a delimiter\r
- \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%\r
- \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent\r
- % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded\r
- % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now\r
- \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi%\r
- % use the appropriate vbox type\r
- \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax%\r
- \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup%\r
- \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines\r
- \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi%\r
- \bgroup\r
- % "exspand" the preamble\r
- \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}\r
-\r
-% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, \r
-% exit from math mode if needed, and exit\r
-\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status\r
-&% enter isolation/strut column\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed\r
-\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values\r
-% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray\r
-% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values)\r
-\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%\r
-% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox\r
-\crcr\egroup\egroup%\r
-% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed\r
-\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to\r
-% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount]\r
-% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray\r
-% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\\r
-% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid\r
-% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column\r
-% carry strut status into isolation/strut column\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status\r
-&% enter isolation/strut column\r
-\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed\r
-% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray\r
-\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%\r
-{\ifnum0=`}\fi%\r
-\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}}\r
-\r
-% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip}\r
-\r
-% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot\r
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}%\r
-\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% starts the halign preamble build\r
-\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register\r
-\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known\r
-\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start\r
-\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known\r
-% ensure these are valid\r
-\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}%\r
-\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition\r
-% currently acquired numerically referenced glue\r
-% use a name that is easier to remember\r
-\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%\r
-\@IEEEBPcurnum=0%\r
-% tracks number of columns in the preamble\r
-\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0%\r
-% record the default end glues\r
-\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}%\r
-% now parse the user's column specifications\r
-\@@IEEEbuildpreamble}\r
-\r
-\r
-% parses and builds the halign preamble\r
-\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble%\r
-% use only the very first token to check the end\r
-% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here\r
-\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%\r
-\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent\r
-\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%\r
-% identify current and next token type\r
-\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid\r
-\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next\r
-% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def\r
-\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi%\r
-% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name\r
-\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi%\r
-% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue\r
-\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi%\r
-% process the acquired glue \r
-\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi%\r
-% process the acquired col \r
-\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi%\r
-% ready prevtype for next col spec.\r
-\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype%\r
-% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group\r
-\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% executed just after preamble build is completed\r
-% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue\r
-\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax\r
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}%\r
-{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}%\r
-\fi%num cols less than 1\r
-%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue\r
-\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% Identify and return the column specifier's type code\r
-\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%\r
-% use only the very first token to determine the type\r
-% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here\r
-\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%\r
-\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent\r
-% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded\r
-% n = number\r
-% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12)\r
-% c = letter\r
-% e = \end\r
-% u = undefined\r
-% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char\r
-\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise\r
-\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else\r
-\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences\r
-\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else\r
-\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else\r
-\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else\r
-\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else\r
-\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else\r
-\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else\r
-\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else\r
-\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else\r
-\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else\r
-\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else\r
-\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax\r
-\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\r
-\if#2u\relax\r
-\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}%\r
-{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak\r
-as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% identify the current letter referenced column\r
-% if invalid, use a default column\r
-\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%\r
-\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name\r
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak\r
-Using a default centering column instead}%\r
-{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%\r
-\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value\r
-\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{%\r
-% ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em)\r
-% , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em)\r
-% : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em)\r
-% ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em)\r
-% ' = \quad 1em\r
-% " = \qquad 2em\r
-% . = 0.5\arraycolsep\r
-% / = \arraycolsep\r
-% ? = 2\arraycolsep\r
-% * = 1fil\r
-% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter\r
-% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero\r
-% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6\r
-% value for 1em.\r
-% \r
-% use only the very first token to determine the type\r
-% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text\r
-% \noindent is used as a delimiter here\r
-\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%\r
-\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent\r
-% get the math font 1em value\r
-% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs\r
-% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters.\r
-% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure\r
-% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done,\r
-% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work.\r
-% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic.\r
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}%\r
-% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad).\r
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax%\r
-% identify the glue value based on the first token\r
-% we discard anything after the first\r
-\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else\r
-\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else\r
-\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else\r
-\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else\r
-\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else\r
-\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else\r
-\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else\r
-\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else\r
-\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else\r
-\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else\r
-\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else\r
-\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else\r
-\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%\r
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak\r
-column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak\r
-0pt instead}%\r
-{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak \r
-IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% process a numerical digit from the column specification\r
-% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value\r
-% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired\r
-\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%\r
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak\r
-specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak\r
-after the first}%\r
-{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak \r
-in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%\r
-\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded\r
-\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%\r
-\else% if we previously aborted a glue\r
-\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion\r
-\else%acquire this number\r
-% save the previous type before the numerical digits started\r
-\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi%\r
-\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax%\r
-\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan\r
-\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition\r
-\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%\r
-\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}%\r
-\else%user glue not defined\r
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak\r
-column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak\r
-0pt instead}%\r
-{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak\r
-\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}%\r
-\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%\r
-\fi% glue defined or not\r
-\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue\r
-\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue\r
-\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition\r
-\fi%close acquisition, get glue\r
-\fi%discard or acquire number\r
-\fi%prevtype glue or not\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% process an acquired glue\r
-% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble\r
-\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions\r
-\else\r
-% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else \r
-% as this is not used in the preamble, but before\r
-\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}%\r
-\else%not the start glue\r
-\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues\r
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak\r
-specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak\r
-after the first}%\r
-{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak \r
-in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%\r
-\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue\r
-\else% not a back to back glue\r
-\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble\r
-\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi\r
-\toks0={##}%\r
-% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this\r
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi\r
-% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand\r
-% the column definition\r
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}%\r
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%\r
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%\r
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%\r
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%\r
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%\r
-\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%\r
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%\r
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%\r
-\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%\r
-\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble\r
-\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column\r
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak\r
-type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak \r
-specifier}%\r
-{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak\r
-between column types.}%\r
-\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue\r
-\fi% previous was a column\r
-\fi% back-to-back glues\r
-\fi% is start column glue\r
-\fi% prev type not a\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble\r
-\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else\r
-\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else\r
-% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue)\r
-% so we must add this column to the preamble now\r
-\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first\r
-\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue\r
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue\r
-\toks0={##}%\r
-% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this\r
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi\r
-% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand\r
-% the column definition\r
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%\r
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%\r
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%\r
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%\r
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%\r
-\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%\r
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%\r
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%\r
-\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%\r
-\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble\r
-\fi%next type not numeral\r
-\fi%next type not glue\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-%%\r
-%% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS\r
-%%\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different\r
-% modes IEEEtran supports\r
-\if@twoside\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\r
- \def\ps@headings{%\r
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}\r
- \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\r
- \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%\r
- \else\r
- \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}\r
- \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}\r
- \fi\r
- \else\r
- \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}\r
- \fi}\r
- \else % not a technote\r
- \def\ps@headings{%\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\r
- \def\@oddhead{}\r
- \def\@evenhead{}\r
- \else\r
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}\r
- \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}\r
- \fi\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\r
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}\r
- \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\r
- \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%\r
- \else\r
- \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}\r
- \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}\r
- \fi\r
- \else\r
- \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%\r
- \fi}\r
- \fi\r
-\else % single side\r
-\def\ps@headings{%\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\r
- \def\@oddhead{}\r
- \def\@evenhead{}\r
- \else\r
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}\r
- \def\@evenhead{}\r
- \fi\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\r
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}\r
- \def\@evenhead{}\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\r
- \def\@oddfoot{}\r
- \else\r
- \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT}\r
- \fi\r
- \else\r
- \def\@oddfoot{}\r
- \fi\r
- \def\@evenfoot{}}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% title page style\r
-\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\r
- \def\@oddhead{}%\r
- \def\@evenhead{}%\r
-\else\r
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%\r
- \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%\r
-\fi\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\r
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%\r
- \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else\r
- \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%\r
- \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%\r
- \fi\r
-\else\r
- % all non-draft mode footers\r
- \if@IEEEusingpubid\r
- % for title pages that are using a pubid\r
- % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\r
- \else\r
- \footskip 0pt%\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
- \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%\r
- \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%\r
- \else\r
- \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%\r
- \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%\r
- \fi\r
- \fi\r
- \fi\r
-\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% peer review cover page style\r
-\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{%\r
-\def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}%\r
-\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else\r
- \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%\r
- \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%\r
- \fi\r
-\else\r
- % non-draft mode footers\r
- \if@IEEEusingpubid\r
- \footskip 0pt%\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
- \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%\r
- \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%\r
- \else\r
- \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%\r
- \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%\r
- \fi\r
- \fi\r
-\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% start with empty headings\r
-\def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{}\r
-\r
-\r
-%% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same\r
-%% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}. \r
-%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text\r
-%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually\r
-%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the\r
-%% arguments to \markboth.\r
-\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#1}}%\r
-\def\rightmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#2}}}\r
-\def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}}\r
-\r
-\def\today{\ifcase\month\or\r
- January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or\r
- July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi\r
- \space\number\day, \number\year}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS\r
-%% \r
-%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff\r
-% \r
-% \r
-% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], ["\r
-\def\@citex[#1]#2{%\r
- \let\@citea\@empty\r
- \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do\r
- {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}%\r
- \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%\r
- \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi\r
- \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%\r
- \G@refundefinedtrue\r
- \@latex@warning\r
- {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%\r
- {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}}\r
-\r
-% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's\r
-% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the\r
-% following format controls are already defined and will not\r
-% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the\r
-% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" -\r
-% all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12]\r
-% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}.\r
-% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will\r
-% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally\r
-% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in\r
-% that \cite.\r
-% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments\r
-% to produce the IEEE style.\r
-\def\citepunct{], [}\r
-\def\citedash{]--[}\r
-\r
-% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty\r
-\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname}\r
-\r
-% V1.6 class files should always provide these\r
-\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}\r
-\let\@openbib@code\@empty\r
-\r
-\r
-% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later.\r
-% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in\r
-% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty:\r
-% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature}\r
-% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak}\r
-\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}\r
-\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack\r
- \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%\r
- \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%\r
- \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%\r
- \@esphack}\r
-\r
-% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before \r
-% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance\r
-% the columns on the last page\r
-\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that\r
- % the command is not executed\r
-\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage}\r
-\r
-% allow the user to alter the triggered command\r
-\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}}\r
-\r
-% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the\r
-% command is executed\r
-\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1%\r
-\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}%\r
-\r
-% trigger command at the given reference\r
-\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax%\r
-\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax%\r
-\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]}\r
-\r
-% compsoc journals left align the reference numbers\r
-\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}}\r
-\r
-% controls bib item spacing\r
-\def\IEEEbibitemsep{2.5pt plus .5pt}\r
-\r
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}%\r
- \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%\r
- % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger\r
- \footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip%\r
- \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%\r
- {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%\r
- \leftmargin\labelwidth\r
- \labelsep 1em\r
- \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax\r
- \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax\r
- \usecounter{enumiv}%\r
- \let\p@enumiv\@empty\r
- \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%\r
- \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem%\r
- \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}%\r
-\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%\r
-% originally:\r
-% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%\r
-% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more\r
-% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference.\r
-% IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with\r
-% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, \r
-% but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish. \r
-% MDS 11/2000\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100%\r
-\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi%\r
- \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}\r
-\let\endthebibliography=\endlist\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS\r
-% \r
-% \r
-% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author \r
-% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font\r
-\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}}\r
- \r
-\r
-% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation.\r
-% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote\r
-% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} \r
-% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you \r
-% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote\r
-% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks.\r
-% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical\r
-% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that\r
-% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding\r
-% with the text above.\r
-% V1.7 make this a robust command\r
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or%\r
- \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger%\r
- \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS\r
-% \r
-% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode)\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}\r
-% The default if the user does not use an author block\r
-\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}\r
-\r
-% spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode)\r
-% can be negative\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em}\r
-% compsoc conferences need more space here\r
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}}\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{20pt}\fi\r
-\r
-% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode)\r
-% This can be negative.\r
-% IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these\r
-% controls in place in case they ever change their mind.\r
-% Personally, I like 0.75ex.\r
-%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex}\r
-%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex}\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex}\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex}\r
-% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode)\r
-% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make \r
-% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the\r
-% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, \r
-% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep\r
-% these above 2.6ex\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex}\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex}\r
-\r
-% This tracks the required strut size.\r
-% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used.\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}\r
-\r
-% variables to retain font size and style across groups\r
-% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later\r
-\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10}\r
-\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12}\r
-\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1}\r
-\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm}\r
-\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m}\r
-\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n}\r
-\r
-% saves the current font attributes\r
-\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size%\r
-\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip%\r
-\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding%\r
-\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family%\r
-\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series%\r
-\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape}\r
-\r
-% restores the saved font attributes\r
-\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}%\r
-\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}%\r
-\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}%\r
-\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}%\r
-\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}%\r
-\selectfont}\r
-\r
-\r
-% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column\r
-\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse\r
-\r
-\r
-% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace\r
-% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines\r
-% within the halign environment.\r
-% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above\r
-% baseline portion at 70% of the total length.\r
-% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace%\r
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%\r
-\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. \r
-% Makes formatting easy for conferences\r
-%\r
-% use real definitions in conference mode\r
-% name block\r
-\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style\r
-\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row\r
-% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs\r
-% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro\r
-% do a spacer row if needed\r
-\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi\r
-\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column\r
-%restore the correct strut value\r
-\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}%\r
-% input the author names\r
-#1%\r
-% end the row if the user did not already\r
-\crcr}\r
-% spacer row for names\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}}\r
-%\r
-% affiliation block\r
-\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style\r
-\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row\r
-% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs\r
-% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro\r
-% do a spacer row if needed\r
-\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi\r
-\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column\r
-%restore the correct strut value\r
-\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}%\r
-% input the author affiliations\r
-#1%\r
-% end the row if the user did not already\r
-\crcr}\r
-% spacer row for affiliations\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other\r
-% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks.\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\r
-\else\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else\r
- % not conference or peerreviewca mode\r
- \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}%\r
- \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}%\r
- \fi\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style\r
- \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing\r
- \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%\r
- \baselineskip=0pt\relax%\r
- \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font\r
- \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math\r
- \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one\r
- \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing\r
- \everycr{}% ensure no problems here\r
- \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet\r
- \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space\r
- \vtop\bgroup%vtop box\r
- \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax\r
- \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr}\r
-\r
-% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox\r
-\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup}\r
-\r
-% handle bogus star form\r
-\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}}\r
-\r
-% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]\r
-\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip}\r
-\r
-% end the line and do the optional spacer\r
-\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages\r
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNand\r
-\@IEEEWARNandtrue\r
-\r
-% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a\r
-% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid\r
-% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes.\r
-\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override\r
-\r
-\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only\r
- when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse}\r
-\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%\r
-\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%\r
-\fi\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\r
-\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% page clearing command\r
-% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles\r
-% for the inserted blank pages\r
-\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else\r
-\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% user command to invoke the title page\r
-\def\maketitle{\par%\r
- \begingroup%\r
- \normalfont%\r
- \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty\r
- \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author\r
- \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well.\r
- \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines\r
- \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info\r
- % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc\r
- \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}%\r
- \normalsize%\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\r
- \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%\r
- \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks%\r
- \else\r
- \if@twocolumn%\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%\r
- \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%\r
- \else\r
- \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext]%\r
- \fi\r
- \else\r
- \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%\r
- \fi\r
- \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks%\r
- \fi\r
- % pullup page for pubid if used.\r
- \if@IEEEusingpubid\r
- \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}%\r
- \fi \r
- \endgroup\r
- \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax\r
- \gdef\@thanks{}%\r
- % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers\r
- % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}%\r
- \let\thanks\relax}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\r
-\long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}}\r
-\r
-% formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice\r
-% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional\r
-% spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line\r
-\def\@maketitle{\newpage\r
-\begingroup\centering\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes\r
- {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author\r
- \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax\r
- \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\r
- \hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax\r
-\else% not a technote\r
- \vskip0.2em{\Huge\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize}\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\r
- \bfseries\Large\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par%\r
- % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%\r
- {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%\r
- \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\par}\relax\r
- \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\r
- % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode\r
- {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%\r
- \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par\r
- {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax\r
- \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill\r
- \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax\r
- \else% journal or peerreview\r
- {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par\r
- {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax\r
- \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill\r
- \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax\r
- \fi\r
- \fi\r
-\fi\par\endgroup}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers\r
-\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}%\r
-\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}%\r
-\hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax}\r
-\r
-% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def\r
-% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule\r
-\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue}\r
-\r
-\r
-\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark\r
- \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks\r
- \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape\r
- \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}}\r
-\let\@thanks\@empty\r
-\r
-% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par.\r
-\long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and\r
-% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts.\r
-\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}%\r
-\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%\r
-\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax}\r
-\r
-\r
-% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item\r
-\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\r
-\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks\r
-% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\r
-\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark\r
- \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks\r
- \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\r
- {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax\r
- \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}}\r
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item}\r
-\else\r
-% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks\r
-\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}}\r
-% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[]\r
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}%\r
-{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}}\r
-% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument\r
-\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break\r
-\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\r
-\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}%\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\r
-\twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace]\r
-\else\r
-\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\r
-\fi\r
-\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}}\r
-\else\r
-% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected\r
-\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers.\r
-\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}%\r
-\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par\r
-\end{center}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.6 \r
-% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text\r
-% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column\r
-% of two column text (technotes). \r
-\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize\r
-% adjust spacing to next text\r
-% v1.6b handle peer review papers\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\r
-% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages\r
-% regardless of the other paper modes\r
- \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip\r
-\else\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference\r
- \vskip 0.6\baselineskip\r
- \else%\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote\r
- \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%\r
- \else% journal uses more space\r
- \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip%\r
- \fi\r
- \fi\r
-\fi}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.6\r
-% This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors \r
-% and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two \r
-% column text (most common)\r
-% This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the\r
-% main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip\r
-% otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the\r
-% text on the titlepage\r
-% The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account.\r
-\def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{%\r
- % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done\r
- \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height\r
- \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height\r
- \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names\r
- \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns\r
- \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines\r
- % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer\r
- % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to\r
- % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be\r
- % lengthened\r
- % default to journal values\r
- \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}%\r
- \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}%\r
- % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference\r
- \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%\r
- \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%\r
- \fi\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote\r
- \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%\r
- \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%\r
- \fi%\r
- % get the height that the title will take up\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\r
- \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}%\r
- \else\r
- \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}%\r
- \fi\r
- \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign\r
- % add the height of the page textheight\r
- \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight%\r
- % correct for title pages using pubid\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else\r
- % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only.\r
- % And the cover page uses a static spacer.\r
- \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi\r
- \fi%\r
- % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer\r
- \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace%\r
- % \topskip takes away some too\r
- \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip%\r
- % calculate the column height of the main text for lines\r
- % now we calculate the main text height as if holding\r
- % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first\r
- % and discard any excess fractional remainder\r
- % we subtracted the first line, because the first line\r
- % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the\r
- % rest of the lines.\r
- \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight%\r
- \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip%\r
- \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip%\r
- % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will\r
- % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always\r
- % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer\r
- % number of normal size lines\r
- % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer\r
- % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register\r
- \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight%\r
- \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight%\r
- \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip%\r
- % this is the calculated height of the spacer\r
- % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer\r
- % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register\r
- \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight%\r
- \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value\r
- % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase\r
- \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax%\r
- \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%\r
- % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead\r
- \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax%\r
- \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%\r
- \fi%\r
- \else%\r
- % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease\r
- \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%\r
- \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%\r
- \fi%\r
- % set the calculated rigid spacer\r
- \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.6\r
-% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area\r
-% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed\r
-% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer.\r
-\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax\r
-\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}}\r
-\r
-% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords\r
-% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for\r
-% in the dynamic sizer.\r
-\let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax\r
-\long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}}\r
-% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if\r
-% not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed\r
-% in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode.\r
-\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{%\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi\r
-\else% or if not compsoc\r
-\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current\r
-% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing.\r
-\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont\r
-\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip%\r
-\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax}\r
-\r
-\r
-% abstract and keywords are in \small, except \r
-% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize\r
-% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small\r
-% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt\r
-\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}\r
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\r
- \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize\r
-\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}}\r
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines\r
-% so that spacing is more tightly controlled.\r
-\def\abstract{\normalfont\r
- \if@twocolumn\r
- \par\noindent\@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\leavevmode\kern-0pt\textit{\abstractname}---\relax\r
- \else\r
- \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize\r
- \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}\r
-% V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in \r
-% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it)\r
-\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi\r
- \normalfont\normalsize}\r
-\r
-\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\r
- \if@twocolumn\r
- \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\leavevmode\kern-1pt\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}-\relax\r
- \else\r
- \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize\r
- \fi\itshape\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}\r
-\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.5ex}\fi\r
- \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi%\r
- \normalfont\normalsize}\r
-\r
-% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference\r
-\def\abstract{\normalfont\r
- \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip\r
- \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%\r
- \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}\r
-\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\r
- \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip\r
- \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%\r
- \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}\r
- \else% compsoc not conference\r
-\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily\r
- \if@twocolumn\r
- \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax\r
- \else\r
- \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%\r
- \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}\r
-\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily\r
- \if@twocolumn\r
- \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent\r
- \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax\r
- \else\r
- \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%\r
- \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}\r
- \fi\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that\r
-% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token\r
-% \r
-% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input\r
-% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not\r
-% affect the formatting of the text\r
-\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0%\r
-\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1%\r
-\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par%\r
-\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\%\r
-\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ %\r
-\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken%\r
-\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%\r
-\fi%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken%\r
-\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%\r
-\fi%\r
-\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken%\r
-\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%\r
-\fi%\r
-% a control space will come in as a macro\r
-% when it is the last one on a line\r
-\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO%\r
-\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%\r
-\fi%\r
-% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one\r
-% else spit it out and stop gobbling\r
-\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else%\r
-\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi%\r
-\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}%\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% TITLING OF SECTIONS\r
-\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are\r
- % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space\r
- % spacing from section number to title\r
-% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\r
-\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ }\r
-\fi\fi\r
-\r
-\def\@seccntformat#1{\hb@xt@ 1.4em{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hss\relax}}\r
-\def\@seccntformatinl#1{\hb@xt@ 1.1em{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hss\relax}}\r
-\def\@seccntformatch#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax}\r
-\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-% compsoc journals need extra spacing\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\r
-\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax}\r
-\fi\fi\r
-\r
-%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control\r
-%and use \@@par rather than \par\r
-\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%\r
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\r
- \let\@svsec\@empty\r
- \else\r
- \refstepcounter{#1}%\r
- % load section label and spacer into \@svsec\r
- \ifnum #2=1\r
- \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformatch{#1}\relax}%\r
- \else\r
- \ifnum #2>2\r
- \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformatinl{#1}\relax}%\r
- \else\r
- \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%\r
- \fi\r
- \fi\r
- \fi%\r
- \@tempskipa #5\relax\r
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high\r
- \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading\r
- \noindent % subsections are NOT indented\r
- % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title\r
- % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal\r
- {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}%\r
- \endgroup\r
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else\r
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}%\r
- \else % printout low level headings\r
- % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}\r
- % got rid of sectionmark stuff\r
- \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}%\r
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else\r
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}%\r
- \fi%skip down\r
- \@xsect{#5}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% section* handler\r
-%v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control\r
-%and use \@@par rather than \par\r
-\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax\r
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@\r
- %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup\r
- % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal\r
- \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup\r
- % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}\r
- \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi\r
- \@xsect{#3}}\r
-\r
-\r
-%% SECTION heading spacing and font\r
-%%\r
-% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name\r
-% (for \@sect) #2 - section level\r
-% #3 - section heading indent\r
-% #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text)\r
-% If negative, make stretch parts negative too!\r
-% #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading,\r
-% negative: amount to indent main text after heading\r
-% Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation\r
-% #6 - font control\r
-% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent\r
-% trouble when you do something like:\r
-% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... \r
-% IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section\r
-% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good\r
-% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber.\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%\r
-% IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode\r
-\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%\r
-{1sp}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%\r
-\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%\r
-{1sp}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%\r
-\else % for journals\r
-\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex\r
-{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%\r
-\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%\r
-{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% for both journals and conferences\r
-% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody\r
-\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%\r
-{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%\r
-\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%\r
-{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%\r
-\r
-\r
-% compsoc\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\r
-% compsoc conference\r
-\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%\r
-{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%\r
-\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%\r
-{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}%\r
-\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%\r
-{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%\r
-\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%\r
-{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%\r
-\else% compsoc journals\r
-% use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles\r
-\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}%\r
-{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}%\r
-% Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society,\r
-% I have to look up an example.\r
-\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}%\r
-{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}%\r
-\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}%\r
-{0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}%\r
-\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}%\r
-{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%\r
-\fi\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% ENVIRONMENTS\r
-% "box" symbols at end of proofs\r
-\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box\r
-% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one\r
-\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}}\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc\r
-\else\r
-\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support\r
-% for an optional argument.\r
-\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}}\r
-\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape #1: }}\r
-\def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par}\r
-\r
-\r
-%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable\r
-\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent\r
-\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist%\r
- \item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}\r
-\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist%\r
-% V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics\r
-% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.\r
- \item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}\r
-% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with\r
-% lines below.\r
-\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}\r
-\r
-% V1.6\r
-% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection\r
-% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic.\r
-% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number\r
-% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator.\r
-% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection\r
-% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed.\r
-%\r
-% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override\r
-\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}}\r
-% string macro\r
-\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section}\r
-\r
-% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection\r
-% if section in_counter is used\r
-\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%\r
- \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname\r
- {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]%\r
- \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3}\r
- \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection\r
- \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%\r
- \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep\r
- \@thmcounter{#1}}%\r
- \else\r
- \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%\r
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep\r
- \@thmcounter{#1}}%\r
- \fi\r
- \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%\r
- \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE\r
-\ps@headings\r
-\pagenumbering{arabic}\r
-\r
-% normally the page counter starts at 1\r
-\setcounter{page}{1}\r
-% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1\r
-% (for duplex printing)\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\r
- \if@twoside\r
- \setcounter{page}{-1}\r
- \else\r
- \setcounter{page}{0}\r
- \fi\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as\r
-% needed when single sided\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi\r
-% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and\r
-% enforce a rigid position for the last lines\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\r
-% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else\r
- \twocolumn\r
- \fi\r
-\sloppy \r
-\flushbottom\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions\r
-\r
-% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package\r
-% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau\r
-% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command\r
-% is present or not.\r
-% For instance:\r
-% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}}\r
-% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if\r
-% \appendices is invoked.\r
-% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending\r
-% on whether the user specifies a title: \r
-% \section{My appendix title}\r
-% or not:\r
-% \section{}\r
-% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title\r
-% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of\r
-% contents \r
-\begingroup\r
-\catcode`\Q=3\r
-\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}\r
-\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}\r
-\endgroup\r
-% end of \@ifmtarg defs\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.7\r
-% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition\r
-% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices \r
-% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other\r
-% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.)\r
-\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section\r
-\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax}\r
-\r
-% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument}\r
-% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no\r
-% argument (title)\r
-% note we reroute the call to the old \section*\r
-\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{%\r
-\@ifmtarg{#1}{%\r
-\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}%\r
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{%\r
-\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}%\r
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}}\r
-\r
-% we use this if the user calls \section{} after\r
-% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the\r
-% command and its argument. Then, warn the user.\r
-\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless\r
-\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls\r
-% and in the Table of Contents.\r
-% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself\r
-\r
-% appendix command for one single appendix\r
-% normally has no heading. However, if you want a \r
-% heading, you can do so via the optional argument:\r
-% \appendix[Optional Heading]\r
-\def\appendix{\relax}\r
-\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par\r
- % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique\r
- \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}%\r
- % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section\r
- \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%\r
- \setcounter{section}{0}%\r
- \setcounter{subsection}{0}%\r
- \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%\r
- \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%\r
- \gdef\thesection{A}%\r
- \gdef\thesectiondis{}% \r
- \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}%\r
- \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A}\r
- \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter\r
- \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}%\r
- \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{%\r
- \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}%\r
- \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}%\r
- % redefine \section command for appendix\r
- % leave \section* as is\r
- \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{%\r
- \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument\r
- % of the normal form\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% appendices command for multiple appendices\r
-% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to\r
-% declare the individual appendices\r
-\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par\r
- % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique\r
- \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}%\r
- % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section\r
- \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%\r
- \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0\r
- \setcounter{subsection}{0}%\r
- \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%\r
- \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%\r
- \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices%\r
- \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}%\r
- \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}%\r
- \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}%\r
- \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}}\r
- \else%\r
- \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}%\r
- \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}%\r
- \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}%\r
- \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}}\r
- \fi%\r
- \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter\r
- \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix\r
- % redefine \section command for appendices\r
- % leave \section* as is\r
- \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form\r
- \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so,\r
- \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument \r
- % of the normal form\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% \IEEEPARstart\r
-% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the\r
-% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter\r
-% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the\r
-% first word which will be rendered in upper case.\r
-% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to:\r
-% \r
-% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment\r
-% within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart.\r
-% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family\r
-% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that\r
-% interword glue will now work as normal.\r
-% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines.\r
-% \r
-% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too.\r
-% \r
-% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users\r
-% to change the font style.\r
-% \r
-% the number of lines that are indented to clear it\r
-% may need to increase if using decenders\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2}\r
-% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart\r
-% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to\r
-% be overly cautious\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2}\r
-% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text\r
-% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called).\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T}\r
-% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline\r
-% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum\r
-% of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current\r
-% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip\r
-% so that it can respond to changes therein.\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip}\r
-% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in,\r
-% can take zero or one argument.\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries}\r
-% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify\r
-% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument.\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}\r
-% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word,\r
-% can take zero or one argument.\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax}\r
-% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify\r
-% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument.\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}\r
-% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text.\r
-% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced\r
-% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. \r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em}\r
-% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap.\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em}\r
-% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap.\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/}\r
-\r
-% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries}\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape}\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% definition of \IEEEPARstart\r
-% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES\r
-% \r
-% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use\r
-% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter\r
-% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second\r
-% argument is the rest of the first word(s).\r
-\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{%\r
-% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start\r
-% on a new one\r
-\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}%\r
-% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE\r
-% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued\r
-\noindent\r
-% calculate the desired height of the big letter\r
-% it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font\r
-% down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline\r
-\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}%\r
-\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}%\r
-% extract the name of the current font in bold\r
-% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\r
-\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}%\r
-{\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}%\r
-\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}%\r
-% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired\r
-% height of the drop letter\r
-\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%\r
-% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points)\r
-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%\r
-% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size\r
-\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}%\r
-% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the\r
-% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height.\r
-\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax%\r
-\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}%\r
-\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}%\r
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt%\r
-\fi%\r
-% and store it as a counter\r
-\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%\r
-% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital\r
-% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB,\r
-% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA\r
-% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA \r
-% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB\r
-% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer\r
-% division. Hence the use of the counters.\r
-% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will\r
-% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result\r
-\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200%\r
-\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB%\r
-% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by\r
-% floating point values\r
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%\r
-\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%\r
-% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter\r
-% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the\r
-% big letter.\r
-\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%\r
-% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter\r
-% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the\r
-% hanging indent\r
-\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont\r
-\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}%\r
-% end of the isolated calculation environment\r
-% add in the extra clearance we want\r
-\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax%\r
-% add in the optional offset\r
-\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax%\r
-% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents\r
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\r
-\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi\r
-% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the\r
-% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use\r
-% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command\r
-% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other\r
-% text won't be displaced by it.\r
-\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES%\r
-\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}%\r
-\raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}%\r
-\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}%\r
-\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}%\r
-{\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater\r
-% than the specified space of argument one\r
-% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero)\r
-% and issue a \newpage\r
-% \r
-% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill}\r
-% \r
-% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to\r
-% be overly cautious\r
-% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau\r
-% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations,\r
-% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine\r
-% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead\r
-\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable\r
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left\r
-\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left\r
-\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi%\r
-\newpage%\r
-\fi\endgroup}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT\r
-% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size)\r
-% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic!\r
-% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a \r
-% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo.\r
-% MDS 7/2001\r
-% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries\r
-\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade\r
-\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue\r
-\r
-% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies\r
-% and not just the previous section\r
-\newcounter{IEEEbiography}\r
-\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0}\r
-\r
-% photo area size\r
-\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area\r
-\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area\r
-% area cleared for photo\r
-\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area\r
-\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area\r
- % actual depth will be a multiple of \r
- % \baselineskip, rounded up\r
-\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography\r
-\r
-\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize%\r
-\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500%\r
-% we need enough space to support the hanging indent\r
-% the nominal value of the spacer\r
-% and one extra line for good measure\r
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%\r
-\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN%\r
-\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip%\r
-% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start\r
-% with a new one\r
-\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}%\r
-% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill\r
-\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%\r
-% the default box for where the photo goes\r
-\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{%\r
-\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}%\r
-%\r
-% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the\r
-% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above\r
-% and if so, override the default box with what they want\r
-\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}%\r
-\centering%\r
-#1%\r
-\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied\r
-% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before\r
-\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%\r
-% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump\r
-% to the biography, not the previous section\r
-\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%\r
-\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%\r
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%\r
-\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%\r
-\fi%\r
-% one more biography\r
-\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%\r
-% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents \r
-\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}%\r
-% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the\r
-% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so\r
-% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the\r
-% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces.\r
-\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command\r
-\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par\r
-\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box\r
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%\r
-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth\r
-\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth\r
-\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate\r
-% set the hanging indent\r
-\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth%\r
-\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%\r
-% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T\r
-\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}%\r
-% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything\r
-\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{%\r
-\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}%\r
-% now place the author name and begin the bio text\r
-\noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par%\r
-% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area\r
-% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry\r
-% MDS\r
-\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo\r
- \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad\r
- \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line\r
- \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding\r
- \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%\r
- \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut\r
-\fi%\r
-\par\normalfont}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% V1.6\r
-% added biography without a photo environment\r
-\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{%\r
-% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before\r
-\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%\r
-% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump\r
-% to the biography, not the previous section\r
-\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%\r
-\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%\r
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%\r
-\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%\r
-\fi%\r
-% one more biography\r
-\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%\r
-% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents \r
-\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}%\r
-\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500%\r
-\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%\r
-\parskip=0pt\par%\r
-\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont}\r
-\r
-\r
-% provide the user with some old font commands\r
-% got this from article.cls\r
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}\r
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}\r
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}\r
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}\r
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}\r
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}\r
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}\r
-\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}\r
-\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}\r
-\r
-\r
-% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS\r
-% \r
-% holds the special notice text\r
-\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax}\r
- \r
-% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do:\r
-% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle\r
-\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%\r
-\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\Large#1\vspace*{1em}}}%\r
-\else%\r
-\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}%\r
-\fi}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS\r
-% to insert a publisher's ID footer\r
-% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style\r
-% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle\r
-% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page\r
-% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into\r
-% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author \r
-% names and the maintext.\r
-%\r
-% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the\r
-% publisher's ID footer\r
-% IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, \r
-% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction\r
-\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip}\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\r
-% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no\r
-% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the\r
-% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the\r
-% second column\r
-% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on\r
-% Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for\r
-% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip\r
-% and call it even.\r
-\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\r
-\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-% holds the ID text\r
-\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax}\r
-\r
-% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called\r
-\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid\r
-\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse\r
-% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom\r
-% V1.6 use before \maketitle\r
-\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue}\r
-\r
-\r
-% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in\r
-% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of\r
-% the title page when using \IEEEpubid\r
-% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or\r
-% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid\r
-% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the\r
-% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this\r
-% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility\r
-% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been \r
-% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page.\r
-% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc\r
-\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else\r
-\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi}\r
-\r
-% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other\r
-% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to\r
-% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX.\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% Lockout some commands under various conditions\r
-\r
-% general purpose bit bucket\r
-\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin}\r
-\r
-% flags to prevent multiple warning messages\r
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks\r
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\r
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\r
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\r
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\r
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\r
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\r
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\r
-\@IEEEWARNthankstrue\r
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue\r
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue\r
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue\r
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue\r
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue\r
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue\r
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue\r
-\r
-\r
-%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed\r
-%%\r
-% save commands which might be locked out\r
-% so that the user can later restore them if needed\r
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks\r
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart\r
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography\r
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography\r
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto\r
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto\r
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid\r
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol\r
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership\r
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext\r
-\r
-\r
-% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode\r
-% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter\r
-% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch\r
-% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft\r
-% paper.\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\r
-\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart\r
- is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}\r
-\fi\r
-% and for technotes\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\r
-\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart\r
- is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode\r
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\r
-% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid,\r
-% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. \r
-% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead\r
-% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen\r
-% from filling up with redundant messages\r
-\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks\r
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse}\r
-\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart\r
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}\r
-\r
-\r
-% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently.\r
-% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname \r
-% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname )\r
-% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine\r
-% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the \r
-% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command\r
-% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX\r
-% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break.\r
-% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal\r
-% name can be left undisturbed.\r
-\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography\r
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse%\r
-\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}\r
-% and make biography point to our bogus biography\r
-\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography\r
-\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography\r
-\r
-\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto\r
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse%\r
-\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}\r
-\r
-\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid \r
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse}\r
-\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol\r
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse}\r
-\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership\r
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse}\r
-\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext\r
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse}\r
-\fi\r
-\r
-\r
-% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out\r
-\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{%\r
-\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}%\r
-\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks%\r
-\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart%\r
-\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography%\r
-\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography%\r
-\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto%\r
-\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto%\r
-\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid%\r
-\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol%\r
-\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership%\r
-\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% need a backslash character for typeout output\r
-{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12\r
-|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings\r
-\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno).\r
-Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}}\r
-\r
-\r
-% provide for legacy commands\r
-\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA}\r
-\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN}\r
-\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark}\r
-\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}\r
-\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid}\r
-\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol}\r
-\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED}\r
-\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed}\r
-\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen}\r
-\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% provide for legacy environments\r
-\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography}\r
-\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto}\r
-\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords}\r
-\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography}\r
-\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto}\r
-\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords}\r
-\r
-\r
-% provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible\r
-\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent\r
-\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin}\r
-\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth}\r
-\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep}\r
-\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\r
-\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\r
-\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded\r
-% \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof\r
-\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}}\r
-\r
-% V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported.\r
-\def\overrideIEEEmargins{%\r
-\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}%\r
-\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}}\r
-\r
-\r
-\endinput\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-% That's all folks!\r
-\r
-\r
+++ /dev/null
-\documentclass[journal]{IEEEtran}
-
-
-% correct bad hyphenation here
-\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor}
-\usepackage{array}
-\usepackage{booktabs}
-%\setlength{\heavyrulewidth}{1.5pt}
-%\setlength{\abovetopsep}{4pt}
-%\usepackage{pstricks}
-%\usepackage{auto-pst-pdf}
-
-\usepackage{paralist}
-\usepackage{etoolbox}
-\usepackage{float}
-\usepackage{epsfig}
-\usepackage{calc}
- \usepackage{times,amssymb,amsmath,latexsym}
-\usepackage{graphics}
-\usepackage{graphicx}
-\usepackage{epstopdf}
-%\usepackage{amsmath}
-%\usepackage{txfonts}
-%\usepackage[pdf]{pstricks}
-%\usepackage{algorithmic}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage{tikz}
-%\usepackage{algorithm}
-%\usepackage{algpseudocode}
-%\usepackage{algorithmwh}
-\usepackage{subfigure}
-\usepackage{float}
-\usepackage{xspace}
-\usepackage[linesnumbered,ruled,vlined,commentsnumbered]{algorithm2e}
-\usepackage{epsfig}
-\usepackage{caption}
-\usepackage{multicol}
-\usepackage{times}
-\usepackage{graphicx,epstopdf}
-\epstopdfsetup{suffix=}
-\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.ps}
-\DeclareGraphicsRule{.ps}{pdf}{.pdf}{`ps2pdf -dEPSCrop -dNOSAFER #1 \noexpand\OutputFile}
-
-
-
-\begin{document}
-%
-% paper title
-% can use linebreaks \\ within to get better formatting as desired
-\title{Energy-Efficient Distributed Multirounds Coverage Optimization Protocol to Prolong the Lifetime in Wireless Sensor Networks}
-
-\author{Ali Kadhum Idrees,~\IEEEmembership{}
- Karine Deschinkel,~\IEEEmembership{}
- Michel Salomon,~\IEEEmembership{}
- and~Rapha\"el Couturier ~\IEEEmembership{}% <-this % stops a space
-%\thanks{are members in the AND team - DISC department - FEMTO-ST Institute, University of Franche-Comt\'e, Belfort, France.
-% e-mail: ali.idness@edu.univ-fcomte.fr, $\lbrace$karine.deschinkel, michel.salomon, raphael.couturier$\rbrace$@univ-fcomte.fr.}% <-this % stops a space
-%\thanks{}% <-this % stops a space
-\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised January 11, 2007.}}
-
-
-
-% The paper headers
-\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~6, No.~1, January~2007}%
-{Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Journals}
-% The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages
-% after the title page when using the twoside option.
-%
-
-
-% make the title area
-\maketitle
-
-
-\begin{abstract}
-One of the fundamental challenges in Wireless Sensor Networks (WSNs)
-is the coverage preservation and the extension of the network lifetime
-continuously and effectively when monitoring a certain area (or
-region) of interest. In this paper, a Energy-Efficient Distributed
-Multirounds Coverage Optimization Protocol (EDMCOP)
-to improve the lifetime in wireless sensor
-networks is proposed. The area of interest is first divided into
-subregions using a divide-and-conquer method and then the EDMCOP protocol is distributed on the sensor nodes in each subregion. The EDMCOP combines two efficient techniques: Leader election for each subregion after that activity scheduling based optimization is planned for each subregion. The proposed
-EDMCOP works into rounds during which a small number of nodes,
-remaining active for sensing, is selected to ensure coverage so as to maximize the lifetime of wireless sensor network. Each round consists of four phases: (i)~Information Exchange, (ii)~Leader
-Election, (iii)~Decision, and (iv)~Sensing. The decision process is
-carried out by a leader node, which solves an integer program. Compared with some existing
-protocols, simulation results show that the proposed protocol can prolong the
-network lifetime and improve the coverage performance effectively.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\begin{IEEEkeywords}
-Wireless Sensor Networks, Area Coverage, Network lifetime,
-Optimization, Scheduling.
-\end{IEEEkeywords}
-%\keywords{Area Coverage, Network lifetime, Optimization, Distributed Protocol}
-
-\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-\indent The fast developments in the low-cost sensor devices and
-wireless communications have allowed the emergence the WSNs. WSN
-includes a large number of small, limited-power sensors that can
-sense, process and transmit data over a wireless communication. They
-communicate with each other by using multi-hop wireless communications, cooperate together to monitor the area of interest,
-and the measured data can be reported to a monitoring center called sink
-for analysis it~\cite{Sudip03}. There are several applications used the
-WSN including health, home, environmental, military, and industrial
-applications~\cite{Akyildiz02}. One of the major scientific research challenges in WSNs, which are addressed by a large number of literature during the last few years is to design energy efficient approches for coverage and connectivity in WSNs~\cite{conti2014mobile}. The coverage problem is one of the
-fundamental challenges in WSNs~\cite{Nayak04} that consists in monitoring efficiently and continuously
-the area of interest. Thelimited energy of sensors represents the main challenge in the WSNs
-design~\cite{Sudip03}, where it is difficult to replace and/or recharge their batteries because the the area of interest nature (such
-as hostile environments) and the cost. So, it is necessary that a WSN
-deployed with high density because spatial redundancy can then be
-exploited to increase the lifetime of the network. However, turn on
-all the sensor nodes, which monitor the same region at the same time
-leads to decrease the lifetime of the network. To extend the lifetime
-of the network, the main idea is to take advantage of the overlapping
-sensing regions of some sensor nodes to save energy by turning off
-some of them during the sensing phase~\cite{Misra05}. WSNs require
-energy-efficient solutions to improve the network lifetime that is
-constrained by the limited power of each sensor node ~\cite{Akyildiz02}. In this paper, we concentrate on the area
-coverage problem, with the objective of maximizing the network
-lifetime by using an adaptive scheduling. The area of interest is
-divided into subregions and an activity scheduling for sensor nodes is
-planned for each subregion. In fact, the nodes in a subregion can be
-seen as a cluster where each node sends sensing data to the cluster head or the sink node. Furthermore, the activities in a
-subregion/cluster can continue even if another cluster stops due to
-too many node failures. Our scheduling scheme considers rounds, where
-a round starts with a discovery phase to exchange information between
-sensors of the subregion, in order to choose in a suitable manner a
-sensor node to carry out a coverage strategy. This coverage strategy
-involves the solving of an integer program, which provides the
-activation of the sensors for the sensing phase of the current round.
-
-The remainder of the paper is organized as follows. The next section
-% Section~\ref{rw}
-reviews the related work in the field. In section~\ref{Pr}, the problem definition and some background are described. Section~\ref{pd} is devoted to
-the EDMCOP Protocol Description. Section~\ref{cp} gives the coverage model formulation, which is used
-to schedule the activation of sensors. Section~\ref{exp} shows the
-simulation results obtained using the discrete event simulator OMNeT++
-\cite{varga}. They fully demonstrate the usefulness of the proposed
-approach. Finally, we give concluding remarks and some suggestions
-for future works in Section~\ref{sec:conclusion}.
-
-\section{Related works}
-\label{rw}
-
-\indent This section is dedicated to the various approaches proposed
-in the literature for the coverage lifetime maximization problem,
-where the objective is to optimally schedule sensors' activities in
-order to extend network lifetime in WSNs. Cardei and Wu \cite{cardei2006energy} provide a taxonomy for coverage algorithms in WSNs according to several design choices:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Sensors scheduling Algorithms, i.e. centralized or distributed/localized algorithms.
-\item The objective of sensor coverage, i.e. to maximize the network lifetime
-or to minimize the number of sensors during the sensing period.
-\item The homogeneous or heterogeneous nature of the
-nodes, in terms of sensing or communication capabilities.
-\item The node deployment method, which may be random or deterministic.
-\item Additional requirements for energy-efficient
-coverage and connected coverage.
-\end{itemize}
-
- The independency in the cover set (i.e. whether the cover sets are disjoint or non-disjoint) \cite{zorbas2010solving} is another design choice that can be added to the above
-list.
-
-\subsection{Centralized Approaches}
-%{\bf Centralized approaches}
-The major approach is
-to divide/organize the sensors into a suitable number of set covers
-where each set completely covers an interest region and to activate
-these set covers successively. The centralized algorithms always provide nearly or close to optimal solution since the algorithm has global view of the whole network. However, its advantage of
-this type of algorithms is that it requires very low processing power from the sensor nodes, which usually have
-limited processing capabilities where the schdule of selected sensor nodes will be computed on the base stations and then sent it to the sensor nodes to apply it to monitor the area of interest.
-
-The first algorithms proposed in the literature consider that the cover
-sets are disjoint: a sensor node appears in exactly one of the
-generated cover sets. For instance, Slijepcevic and Potkonjak
-\cite{Slijepcevic01powerefficient} propose an algorithm, which
-allocates sensor nodes in mutually independent sets to monitor an area
-divided into several fields. Their algorithm builds a cover set by
-including in priority the sensor nodes, which cover critical fields,
-that is to say fields that are covered by the smallest number of
-sensors. The time complexity of their heuristic is $O(n^2)$ where $n$
-is the number of sensors. Abrams et al.~\cite{abrams2004set} design three approximation
-algorithms for a variation of the set k-cover problem, where the
-objective is to partition the sensors into covers such that the number
-of covers that includes an area, summed over all areas, is maximized.
-Their work builds upon previous work
-in~\cite{Slijepcevic01powerefficient} and the generated cover sets do
-not provide complete coverage of the monitoring zone.
-\cite{cardei2005improving} propose a method to efficiently
-compute the maximum number of disjoint set covers such that each set
-can monitor all targets. They first transform the problem into a
-maximum flow problem, which is formulated as a mixed integer
-programming (MIP). Then their heuristic uses the output of the MIP to
-compute disjoint set covers. Results show that this heuristic
-provides a number of set covers slightly larger compared to
-\cite{Slijepcevic01powerefficient} but with a larger execution time
-due to the complexity of the mixed integer programming resolution.
-
-Zorbas et al. \cite{zorbas2010solving} presented a centralised greedy
-algorithm for the efficient production of both node disjoint
-and non-disjoint cover sets. Compared to algorithm's results of Slijepcevic and Potkonjak
-\cite{Slijepcevic01powerefficient}, their heuristic produces more
-disjoint cover sets with a slight growth rate in execution time. When producing non-disjoint cover sets, both Static-CCF and Dynamic-CCF provide cover sets offering longer network lifetime than those produced by
-\cite{cardei2005energy}. Also, they require a smaller number of node participations in order to
-achieve these results.
-
-In the case of non-disjoint algorithms \cite{pujari2011high}, sensors may
-participate in more than one cover set. In some cases, this may
-prolong the lifetime of the network in comparison to the disjoint
-cover set algorithms, but designing algorithms for non-disjoint cover
-sets generally induces a higher order of complexity. Moreover, in
-case of a sensor's failure, non-disjoint scheduling policies are less
-resilient and less reliable because a sensor may be involved in more
-than one cover sets. For instance, Cardei et al.~\cite{cardei2005energy}
-present a linear programming (LP) solution and a greedy approach to
-extend the sensor network lifetime by organizing the sensors into a
-maximal number of non-disjoint cover sets. Simulation results show
-that by allowing sensors to participate in multiple sets, the network
-lifetime increases compared with related
-work~\cite{cardei2005improving}. In~\cite{berman04}, the
-authors have formulated the lifetime problem and suggested another
-(LP) technique to solve this problem. A centralized solution based on the Garg-K\"{o}nemann
-algorithm~\cite{garg98}, provably near
-the optimal solution, is also proposed.
-
-\subsection{Distributed approaches}
-%{\bf Distributed approaches}
-In distributed $\&$ localized coverage algorithms, the required computation to schedule the activity of sensor nodes will be done by the cooperation among the neighbours nodes. These algorithms may require more computation power for the processing by the cooperated sensor nodes but they are more scaleable for large WSNs. Normally, the localized and distributed algorithms result in non-disjoint set covers.
-
-Some distributed algorithms have been developed
-in~\cite{Gallais06,Tian02,Ye03,Zhang05,HeinzelmanCB02, yardibi2010distributed} to perform the
-scheduling so as to coverage preservation. Distributed algorithms typically operate in rounds for
-a predetermined duration. At the beginning of each round, a sensor
-exchanges information with its neighbors and makes a decision to either
-remain turned on or to go to sleep for the round. This decision is
-basically made on simple greedy criteria like the largest uncovered
-area \cite{Berman05efficientenergy}, maximum uncovered targets
-\cite{lu2003coverage}. In \cite{Tian02}, the scheduling scheme is divided
-into rounds, where each round has a self-scheduling phase followed by
-a sensing phase. Each sensor broadcasts a message containing the node ID
-and the node location to its neighbors at the beginning of each round. A
-sensor determines its status by a rule named off-duty eligible rule,
-which tells him to turn off if its sensing area is covered by its
-neighbors. A back-off scheme is introduced to let each sensor delay
-the decision process with a random period of time, in order to avoid
-simultaneous conflicting decisions between nodes and lack of coverage on any area.
-\cite{prasad2007distributed} defines a model for capturing
-the dependencies between different cover sets and proposes localized
-heuristic based on this dependency. The algorithm consists of two
-phases, an initial setup phase during which each sensor computes and
-prioritizes the covers and a sensing phase during which each sensor
-first decides its on/off status, and then remains on or off for the
-rest of the duration.
-
-The authors in \cite{yardibi2010distributed}, are developed a distributed adaptive sleep scheduling algorithm (DASSA) for WSNs with partial coverage. DASSA does not require location information of sensors while maintaining connectivity and satisfying a user defined coverage target. In DASSA, nodes use the residual energy levels and feedback from the sink for scheduling the activity of their neighbors. This feedback mechanism reduces the randomness in scheduling that would otherwise occur due to the absence of location information.
-
-In \cite{ChinhVu}, the author proposed a novel distributed heuristic, called
-Distributed Energy-efficient Scheduling for k-coverage (DESK), which
-ensures that the energy consumption among the sensors is balanced and
-the lifetime maximized while the coverage requirement is maintained.
-This heuristic works in rounds, requires only 1-hop neighbor
-information, and each sensor decides its status (active or sleep)
-based on the perimeter coverage model proposed in
-\cite{Huang:2003:CPW:941350.941367}.
-Idrees et al. ~\cite{idrees2014coverage} proposed a coverage optimization protocol to improve the lifetime in
-heterogeneous energy wireless sensor networks. In this work, the coverage protocol distributed in each sensor node in the subregion but the optimization take place over the the whole subregion. We consider only distributing the coverage protocol over two subregions.
-
-The works presented in \cite{Bang, Zhixin, Zhang} focuses on a Coverage-Aware, Distributed Energy- Efficient and distributed clustering methods respectively, which aims to extend the network lifetime, while the coverage is ensured.
-S. Misra et al. \cite{Misra} proposed a localized algorithm for
-coverage in sensor networks. The algorithm conserve the energy while
-ensuring the network coverage by activating the subset of sensors,
-with the minimum overlap area.The proposed method preserves the
-network connectivity by formation of the network backbone.
-More recently, Shibo et
-al. \cite{Shibo} expressed the coverage problem as a minimum weight
-submodular set cover problem and proposed a Distributed Truncated
-Greedy Algorithm (DTGA) to solve it. They take advantage from both
-temporal and spatial correlations between data sensed by different
-sensors, and leverage prediction, to improve the lifetime.
-
-
-Some other approaches do not consider a synchronized and predetermined
-period of time where the sensors are active or not. Indeed, each
-sensor maintains its own timer and its wake-up time is randomized
-\cite{Ye03} or regulated \cite{cardei2005maximum} over time.
-
-The main contributions of our approach can be summarized as follows: (1) The high coverage ratio, (2) The reduced number of active nodes. 3) The optimization distributed over the subregions in the area of interest. 4) The dynamic leader election at each round based on some priority factors that will apply activity scheduling based optimization on the subregion to activate as less number as possible of sensor nodes to take the mission of the coverage in each subregion(5) The very low energy consumption. 6) The higher network lifetime. 7) primary point coverage model to represent the sensing range of the sensor node. All this came from addresses three main questions to build a scheduling strategy by our EDMCOP Protocol :
-
- {\bf How must the phases for information exchange, decision and
- sensing be planned over time?} Our algorithm divides the time line
- into a number of rounds. Each round contains 4 phases: Information
- Exchange, Leader Election, Decision, and Sensing.
-
- {\bf What are the rules to decide which node has to be turned on
- or off?} Our algorithm tends to limit the overcoverage of points of
- interest to avoid turning on too many sensors covering the same
- areas at the same time, and tries to prevent undercoverage. The
- decision is a good compromise between these two conflicting
- objectives.
-
- {\bf Which node should make such a decision?} As mentioned in
- \cite{pc10}, both centralized and distributed algorithms have their
- own advantages and disadvantages. Centralized coverage algorithms
- have the advantage of requiring very low processing power from the
- sensor nodes which have usually limited processing capabilities.
- Distributed algorithms are very adaptable to the dynamic and
- scalable nature of sensors network. Authors in \cite{pc10} conclude
- that there is a threshold in terms of network size to switch from a
- localized to a centralized algorithm. Indeed the exchange of
- messages in large networks may consume a considerable amount of
- energy in a centralized approach compared to a distributed one. Our
- work does not consider only one leader to compute and to broadcast
- the scheduling decision to all the sensors. When the network size
- increases, the network is divided into many subregions and the
- decision is made by a leader in each subregion.
-
-
-\section{Preliminaries}
-\label{Pr}
-
-\subsection{Coverage Problem}
-The most discussed coverage problems in literature can be classified
-into three types \cite{ghosh2008coverage}\cite{wang2011coverage}: area coverage \cite{mulligan2010coverage}(also called full or blanket
-coverage), target coverage \cite{yang2014novel}, and barrier coverage \cite{HeShibo}. An area coverage problem is to find a minimum number of sensors to work, such that each physical point in the area is within the sensing range of at least one working sensor node.
-Target coverage problem is to cover only a finite number of discrete
-points called targets. This type of coverage has mainly military
-applications. The problem of preventing an intruder from entering a region of interest is referred to as the barrier coverage . Our work will concentrate on the area coverage by design
-and implementation of a strategy, which efficiently selects the active
-nodes that must maintain both sensing coverage and network
-connectivity and at the same time improve the lifetime of the wireless
-sensor network. But, requiring that all physical points of the
-considered region are covered may be too strict, especially where the
-sensor network is not dense. Our approach represents an area covered
-by a sensor as a set of primary points and tries to maximize the total
-number of primary points that are covered in each round, while
-minimizing overcoverage (points covered by multiple active sensors
-simultaneously).
-
-
-\subsection{Network Lifetime}
-Various definitions exist for the lifetime of a sensor
-network~\cite{die09}. The main definitions proposed in the literature are
-related to the remaining energy of the nodes or to the coverage percentage.
-The lifetime of the network is mainly defined as the amount
-of time during which the network can satisfy its coverage objective (the
-amount of time that the network can cover a given percentage of its
-area or targets of interest). In this work, we assume that the network
-is alive until all nodes have been drained of their energy or the
-sensor network becomes disconnected, and we measure the coverage ratio
-during the WSN lifetime. Network connectivity is important because an
-active sensor node without connectivity towards a base station cannot
-transmit information on an event in the area that it monitors.
-
-\subsection{Activity Scheduling }
-Activity scheduling is to schedule the activation and deac-
-tivation of sensor nodes. The basic objective is to decide which
-sensors are in what states (active or sleeping mode) and for
-how long, so that the application coverage requirement can be
-guaranteed and the network lifetime can be prolonged. Various
-approaches, including centralized, distributed, and localized
-algorithms, have been proposed for activity scheduling. In
-distributed algorithms, each node in the network autonomously
-makes decisions on whether to turn on or turn off itself only
-using local neighbor information. In centralized algorithms, a
-central controller (a node or base station) informs every sensors
-of the time intervals to be activated. There are many sensor node scheduling methods are proposed in \cite{wang2010clique}, where they are grouped into two main categories:round-based sensor node scheduling in which, sensor nodes will execute the scheduling
-algorithm during the initialization of each round and group-based sensor node scheduling in which, each node will performs the scheduling algorithm only once after its deployment and after
-the execution of scheduling algorithm, all nodes will be allocated into different groups.
-
-
-
-\section{ The EDMCOP Protocol Description}
-\label{pd}
-
-In this section, we introduce Energy-Efficient Distributed
-Multirounds Coverage Optimization Protocol named EDMCOP, which is distributed on the subregions for the area of interest. It is based on two efficient techniques: network
-leader election and sensor activity scheduling for coverage preservation and energy conservation continuously and efficiently to maximize the lifetime in the network.
-The main features of our EDMCOP protocol: i)It divides the area of interest into subregions. ii)It requires only the information of the nodes within the subregion. iii) it divides the network lifetime into rounds. iv)It based on the autonomous distributed decision by the nodes in the subregion to elect the Leader, which will apply the activity scheduling based optimization on the subregion. v) it achieves an energy consumption balancing among the nodes in the subregion by selecting the nodes with maximum energy as leader in each round. vi) It uses the optimization to select the best representative set of sensors in the subregion by optimize the coverage and the lifetime over the area of interest.
-vii)It uses our developed primary point coverage model, which represent the sensing range of the sensor as a set of points, which are used by the our optimization algorithm. viii) It uses a simple energy model that takes communication, sensing and computation energy consumptions into account to evaluate the performance of our Protocol.
-
-
-\subsection{ Assumptions and Models}
-We consider a randomly and uniformly deployed network consisting of
-static wireless sensors. The wireless sensors are deployed in high
-density to ensure initially a full coverage of the interested area. We
-assume that all nodes are homogeneous in terms of communication and
-processing capabilities and heterogeneous in term of energy provision.
-The location information is available to the sensor node either
-through hardware such as embedded GPS or through location discovery
-algorithms.
-\indent We consider a boolean disk coverage model which is the most
-widely used sensor coverage model in the literature. Each sensor has a
-constant sensing range $R_s$. All space points within a disk centered
-at the sensor with the radius of the sensing range is said to be
-covered by this sensor. We also assume that the communication range $R_c \geq 2R_s$.
-In fact, Zhang and Zhou~\cite{Zhang05} proved that if the transmission range fulfills the
-previous hypothesis, a complete coverage of a convex area implies
-connectivity among the working nodes in the active mode.
-
-
-
-%\begin{figure}[h!]
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{cc}
-%%\includegraphics[scale=0.25]{fig1.pdf}\\ %& \includegraphics[scale=0.10]{1.pdf} \\
-%%(A) Figure 1 & (B) Figure 2
-%\end{tabular}
-%\caption{Unit Circle in radians. }
-%\label{fig:cluster1}
-%\end{figure}
-
-%By using the Unit Circle in figure~\ref{fig:cluster1},
-%We choose to representEach wireless sensor node will be represented into a selected number of primary points by which we can know if the sensor node is covered or not.
-% Figure ~\ref{fig:cluster2} shows the selected primary points that represents the area of the sensor node and according to the sensing range of the wireless sensor node.
-
-\indent Instead of working with the coverage area, we consider for each
-sensor a set of points called primary points. We also assume that the
-sensing disk defined by a sensor is covered if all the primary points of
-this sensor are covered.
-%\begin{figure}[h!]
-%\centering
-%\begin{tabular}{cc}
-%%\includegraphics[scale=0.25]{fig2.pdf}\\ %& \includegraphics[scale=0.10]{1.pdf} \\
-%%(A) Figure 1 & (B) Figure 2
-%\end{tabular}
-%\caption{Wireless Sensor Node Area Coverage Model.}
-%\label{fig:cluster2}
-%\end{figure}
-By knowing the position (point center: ($p_x,p_y$)) of a wireless
-sensor node and its $R_s$, we calculate the primary points directly
-based on the proposed model. We use these primary points (that can be
-increased or decreased if necessary) as references to ensure that the
-monitored region of interest is covered by the selected set of
-sensors, instead of using all the points in the area.
-
-\indent We can calculate the positions of the selected primary
-points in the circle disk of the sensing range of a wireless sensor
-node (see figure~\ref{fig1}) as follows:\\
-$(p_x,p_y)$ = point center of wireless sensor node\\
-$X_1=(p_x,p_y)$ \\
-$X_2=( p_x + R_s * (1), p_y + R_s * (0) )$\\
-$X_3=( p_x + R_s * (-1), p_y + R_s * (0)) $\\
-$X_4=( p_x + R_s * (0), p_y + R_s * (1) )$\\
-$X_5=( p_x + R_s * (0), p_y + R_s * (-1 )) $\\
-$X_6= ( p_x + R_s * (\frac{-\sqrt{2}}{2}), p_y + R_s * (0)) $\\
-$X_7=( p_x + R_s * (\frac{\sqrt{2}}{2}), p_y + R_s * (0))$\\
-$X_8=( p_x + R_s * (\frac{-\sqrt{2}}{2}), p_y + R_s * (\frac{-\sqrt{2}}{2})) $\\
-$X_9=( p_x + R_s * (\frac{\sqrt{2}}{2}), p_y + R_s * (\frac{-\sqrt{2}}{2})) $\\
-$X_{10}=( p_x + R_s * (\frac{-\sqrt{2}}{2}), p_y + R_s * (\frac{\sqrt{2}}{2})) $\\
-$X_{11}=( p_x + R_s * (\frac{\sqrt{2}}{2}), p_y + R_s * (\frac{\sqrt{2}}{2})) $\\
-$X_{12}=( p_x + R_s * (0), p_y + R_s * (\frac{\sqrt{2}}{2})) $\\
-$X_{13}=( p_x + R_s * (0), p_y + R_s * (\frac{-\sqrt{2}}{2})) $.
-
- \begin{figure}[h!]
-%\centering
-% \begin{multicols}{6}
-\centering
-%\includegraphics[scale=0.10]{fig21.pdf}\\~ ~ ~(a)
-%\includegraphics[scale=0.10]{fig22.pdf}\\~ ~ ~(b)
-\includegraphics[scale=0.25]{principles13.eps}
-%\includegraphics[scale=0.10]{fig25.pdf}\\~ ~ ~(d)
-%\includegraphics[scale=0.10]{fig26.pdf}\\~ ~ ~(e)
-%\includegraphics[scale=0.10]{fig27.pdf}\\~ ~ ~(f)
-%\end{multicols}
-\caption{Wireless sensor node represented by 13 primary points}
-\label{fig1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\subsection{The Main Idea}
-The area of interest can be divided using the
-divide-and-conquer strategy into smaller areas called subregions and
-then our coverage protocol will be implemented in each subregion
-simultaneously. Our EDMCOP protocol works in rounds fashion as shown in figure~\ref{fig2}.
-\begin{figure}[ht!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[width=85mm]{FirstModel.eps} % 70mm
-\caption{EDMCOP protocol}
-\label{fig2}
-\end{figure}
-
-Each round is divided into 4 phases : Information (INFO) Exchange,
-Leader Election, Decision, and Sensing. For each round there is
-exactly one set cover responsible for the sensing task. This protocol is
-more reliable against an unexpected node failure because it works
-in rounds. On the one hand, if a node failure is detected before
-making the decision, the node will not participate to this phase, and,
-on the other hand, if the node failure occurs after the decision, the
-sensing task of the network will be temporarily affected: only during
-the period of sensing until a new round starts, since a new set cover
-will take charge of the sensing task in the next round. The energy
-consumption and some other constraints can easily be taken into
-account since the sensors can update and then exchange their
-information (including their residual energy) at the beginning of each
-round. However, the pre-sensing phases (INFO Exchange, Leader
-Election, Decision) are energy consuming for some nodes, even when
-they do not join the network to monitor the area.
-We define two types of packets to be used by our EDMCOP protocol.
-\begin{enumerate}[(a)]
-\item INFO packet: sent by each sensor node to all the nodes of it's subregion for information exchange.
-\item ActiveSleep packet: sent by the leader to all the nodes in the same of it's subregion to inform them to be Active or Sleep during the sensing phase.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-There are four status for each sensor node in the network
-\begin{enumerate}[(a)]
-\item LISTENING: Sensor has not yet decided.
-\item ACTIVE: Sensor is active.
-\item SLEEP: Sensor decides to turn off.
-\item COMMUNICATION: Sensor is Transmitting or Receiving packet.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-Below, we describe each phase in more details.
-
-\subsubsection{Information Exchange Phase}
-
-Each sensor node $j$ sends its position, remaining energy $RE_j$, and
-the number of neighbours $NBR_j$ to all wireless sensor nodes in
-its subregion by using an INFO packet and then listens to the packets
-sent from other nodes. After that, each node will have information
-about all the sensor nodes in the subregion. In our model, the
-remaining energy corresponds to the time that a sensor can live in the
-active mode.
-
-%\subsection{\textbf Working Phase:}
-
-%The working phase works in rounding fashion. Each round include 3 steps described as follow :
-
-\subsubsection{Leader Election Phase}
-This step includes choosing the Wireless Sensor Node Leader (WSNL),
-which will be responsible for executing the coverage algorithm. Each
-subregion in the area of interest will select its own WSNL
-independently for each round. All the sensor nodes cooperate to
-select WSNL. The nodes in the same subregion will select the leader
-based on the received information from all other nodes in the same
-subregion. The selection criteria in order of priority are: larger
-number of neighbours, larger remaining energy, and then in case of
-equality, larger index. The pseudo-code for leader election phase is provided in Algorithm~1.
-\begin{algorithm}
- \KwIn{all the parameters related to information exchange}
- \KwOut{$node-id$ (: the id of the winner sensor node, which is the leader of current round)}
- \BlankLine
- \emph{Select the node(s) with higher $NBR_j$ and $ RE_j \geqslant E_{th}$} \;
-
- \If{ there are more than two nodes with the same maximum $NBR_j$ }{
- \If{ there are more than two nodes with the same maximum $NBR_j$ and the same $RE_j$}{
- \emph{ Select the node with higher id} \;
- }
- \Else{
- \emph{Select the node with maximum $RE_j$} \;
- }
- }
- \Else{
- \emph{ Select the node with higher $NBR_j$ } \;
- }
-
- \emph{return node-id} \;
-\caption{LEADER ELECTION}
-\label{alg:LEADER}
-
-\end{algorithm}
-
-Where $E_{th}$ is the minimum energy needed to stay active during the sensing phase. As shown in Algorithm~1, the more priority selection factor is the number of $1-hop$ neighbours, $NBR j$, which can minimize the energy consumption during the communication Significantly.
-
-
-\subsubsection{Decision phase}
-The WSNL will solve an integer program (see section~\ref{cp}) to
-select which sensors will be activated in the following sensing phase
-to cover the subregion. WSNL will send Active-Sleep packet to each
-sensor in the subregion based on the algorithm's results.
-
-
-\subsubsection{Sensing phase}
-Active sensors in the round will execute their sensing task to
-preserve maximal coverage in the region of interest. We will assume
-that the cost of keeping a node awake (or asleep) for sensing task is
-the same for all wireless sensor nodes in the network. Each sensor
-will receive an Active-Sleep packet from WSNL informing it to stay
-awake or to go to sleep for a time equal to the period of sensing until
-starting a new round.
-
-\subsection{EDMCOP protocol Algorithm}
-we first show the pseudo-code of EDMCOP protocol, which is executed by each sensor in the subregion and then describe it in more detail.
-
-\begin{algorithm}
- % \KwIn{all the parameters related to information exchange}
-% \KwOut{$winer-node$ (: the id of the winner sensor node, which is the leader of current round)}
- \BlankLine
- \emph{Initialize the sensor node and determine it's position and it's subregion} \;
-
- \If{ $RE_j \geq E_{th}$ }{
- \emph{ Send and Receive INFO Packet to and from other nodes in the subregion}\;
- \emph{ Collect information and construct the list L for all nodes in the subregion}\;
- \emph{ $s_j.status$ = LISTENING}\;
- \If{ the received INFO Packet = number of nodes in it's subregion -1 }{
- \emph{ LeaderID $\leftarrow$ \bf Algorithm~\ref{alg:LEADER}}\;
- \If{ $ s_j.ID = LeaderID $}{
- \emph{Execute Integer Program Algorithm (Gbest) }\;
- \For{$k\leftarrow 1$ \KwTo No. of nodes in subregion}{
- \If{$ s_j.ID \neq L_k$ }{
- \If{$ Gbest_k = 1$ }{
- \emph{ Send ActiveSleep() Packet with status = ACTIVE }\;
- }
- \Else{\emph{Send ActiveSleep() Packet with status = SLEEP}\;}
- \Else{
- \If{$ Gbest_k = 1$ }{
- \emph{ $s_j.status$ = ACTIVE}\;
- \emph{UPDATE Remaining Energy $RE_j $}\;
- }
- \Else{
- \emph{ $s_j.status$ = SLEEP}\;
- \emph{UPDATE Remaining Energy $RE_j $}\;
- }
- }
- }
- }
-
- }
- \Else{
- \emph{Wait ActiveSleep() Packet from the Leader}\;
- \If{received ActiveSleep().status = ACTIVE }{
- \emph{ $s_j.status$ = ACTIVE}\;
- \emph{UPDATE Remaining Energy $RE_j $}\;
- }
- \Else{
- \emph{ $s_j.status$ = SLEEP}\;
- \emph{UPDATE Remaining Energy $RE_j $}\;
- }
- }
- }
-
- }
- \Else { Exclude me from entering in the current round}
-
- % \emph{return X} \;
-\caption{EDMCOP($s_j$)}
-\label{alg:DMRCLOP}
-
-\end{algorithm}
-
-The EDMCOP protocol work in rounds and executed at each sensor node in the network , each sensor node can still sense data while being in
-LISTENING mode. Thus, by entering the LISTENING mode at the beginning of each round,
-sensor nodes still executing sensing task while participating in the leader election and decision phases. More specifically, The EDMCOP protocol algorithm works as follow:
-Initially, the sensor node check it's remaining energy in order to participate in the current round. Each sensor node determines it's position and it's subregion based Embedded GPS or Location Discovery Algorithm. After that, All the sensors collect position coordinates, current remaining energy, sensor node id, and the number of its one-hop live neighbors during the information exchange. It stores this information into a list L.
-The sensor node enter in listening mode waiting to receive ActiveSleep packet from the leader to take the decision. Each sensor node will execute the Algorithm~1 to know who is the leader. After that, if the sensor node is leader, It will execute the integer program algorithm ( see section~\ref{cp}) to optimize the coverage and the lifetime in it's subregion. After the decision, the optimization approach will select the set of sensor nodes to take the mission of coverage during the sensing phase. The leader will send ActiveSleep packet to each sensor node in the subregion to inform him to it's status during the period of sensing, either Active or sleep until the starting of next round. Based on the decision, the leader as other nodes in subregion, either go to be active or go to be sleep during current sensing phase. the other nodes in the same subregion will stay in listening mode waiting the ActiveSleep packet from the leader. After finishing the time period for sensing, all the sensor nodes in the same subregion will start new round by executing the EDMCOP protocol and the lifetime in the subregion will continue until all the sensor nodes are died or the network becomes disconnected in the subregion.
-
-\section{Coverage problem formulation}
-\label{cp}
-
-
-\indent Our model is based on the model proposed by
-\cite{pedraza2006} where the objective is to find a maximum number of
-disjoint cover sets. To accomplish this goal, authors proposed an
-integer program, which forces undercoverage and overcoverage of targets
-to become minimal at the same time. They use binary variables
-$x_{jl}$ to indicate if sensor $j$ belongs to cover set $l$. In our
-model, we consider binary variables $X_{j}$, which determine the
-activation of sensor $j$ in the sensing phase of the round. We also
-consider primary points as targets. The set of primary points is
-denoted by $P$ and the set of sensors by $J$.
-
-\noindent For a primary point $p$, let $\alpha_{jp}$ denote the
-indicator function of whether the point $p$ is covered, that is:
-\begin{equation}
-\alpha_{jp} = \left \{
-\begin{array}{l l}
- 1 & \mbox{if the primary point $p$ is covered} \\
- & \mbox{by sensor node $j$}, \\
- 0 & \mbox{otherwise.}\\
-\end{array} \right.
-%\label{eq12}
-\end{equation}
-The number of active sensors that cover the primary point $p$ is equal
-to $\sum_{j \in J} \alpha_{jp} * X_{j}$ where:
-\begin{equation}
-X_{j} = \left \{
-\begin{array}{l l}
- 1& \mbox{if sensor $j$ is active,} \\
- 0 & \mbox{otherwise.}\\
-\end{array} \right.
-%\label{eq11}
-\end{equation}
-We define the Overcoverage variable $\Theta_{p}$ as:
-\begin{equation}
- \Theta_{p} = \left \{
-\begin{array}{l l}
- 0 & \mbox{if the primary point}\\
- & \mbox{$p$ is not covered,}\\
- \left( \sum_{j \in J} \alpha_{jp} * X_{j} \right)- 1 & \mbox{otherwise.}\\
-\end{array} \right.
-\label{eq13}
-\end{equation}
-\noindent More precisely, $\Theta_{p}$ represents the number of active
-sensor nodes minus one that cover the primary point $p$.\\
-The Undercoverage variable $U_{p}$ of the primary point $p$ is defined
-by:
-\begin{equation}
-U_{p} = \left \{
-\begin{array}{l l}
- 1 &\mbox{if the primary point $p$ is not covered,} \\
- 0 & \mbox{otherwise.}\\
-\end{array} \right.
-\label{eq14}
-\end{equation}
-
-\noindent Our coverage optimization problem can then be formulated as follows
-\begin{equation} \label{eq:ip2r}
-\left \{
-\begin{array}{ll}
-\min \sum_{p \in P} (w_{\theta} \Theta_{p} + w_{U} U_{p})&\\
-\textrm{subject to :}&\\
-\sum_{j \in J} \alpha_{jp} X_{j} - \Theta_{p}+ U_{p} =1, &\forall p \in P\\
-%\label{c1}
-%\sum_{t \in T} X_{j,t} \leq \frac{RE_j}{e_t} &\forall j \in J \\
-%\label{c2}
-\Theta_{p}\in \mathbb{N} , &\forall p \in P\\
-U_{p} \in \{0,1\}, &\forall p \in P \\
-X_{j} \in \{0,1\}, &\forall j \in J
-\end{array}
-\right.
-\end{equation}
-
-
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item $X_{j}$ : indicates whether or not the sensor $j$ is actively
- sensing in the round (1 if yes and 0 if not);
-\item $\Theta_{p}$ : {\it overcoverage}, the number of sensors minus
- one that are covering the primary point $p$;
-\item $U_{p}$ : {\it undercoverage}, indicates whether or not the primary point
- $p$ is being covered (1 if not covered and 0 if covered).
-\end{itemize}
-
-The first group of constraints indicates that some primary point $p$
-should be covered by at least one sensor and, if it is not always the
-case, overcoverage and undercoverage variables help balancing the
-restriction equations by taking positive values. There are two main
-objectives. First, we limit the overcoverage of primary points in order to
-activate a minimum number of sensors. Second we prevent the absence of monitoring on
- some parts of the subregion by minimizing the undercoverage. The
-weights $w_\theta$ and $w_U$ must be properly chosen so as to
-guarantee that the maximum number of points are covered during each
-round.
-
-
-\section{Simulation Results and Analysis}
-\label{exp}
-In this section, we conducted a series of simulations to evaluate the
-efficiency and the relevance of our approach, using the discrete event
-simulator OMNeT++ \cite{varga}. The simulation parameters are summarized in
-Table~\ref{table3}
-
-\begin{table}[ht]
-\caption{Relevant parameters for network initializing.}
-% title of Table
-\centering
-% used for centering table
-\begin{tabular}{c|c}
-% centered columns (4 columns)
- \hline
-%inserts double horizontal lines
-Parameter & Value \\ [0.5ex]
-
-%Case & Strategy (with Two Leaders) & Strategy (with One Leader) & Simple Heuristic \\ [0.5ex]
-% inserts table
-%heading
-\hline
-% inserts single horizontal line
-Sensing Field & $(50 \times 25)~m^2 $ \\
-% inserting body of the table
-%\hline
-Nodes Number & 50, 100, 150, 200 and 250~nodes \\
-%\hline
-Initial Energy & 50-75~joules \\
-%\hline
-Sensing Period & 20 Minutes \\
-$E_{thr}$ & 12.2472 \\
-$R_s$ & 5~m \\
-%\hline
-$w_{\Theta}$ & 1 \\
-% [1ex] adds vertical space
-%\hline
-$w_{U}$ & $|P^2|$
-%inserts single line
-\end{tabular}
-\label{table3}
-% is used to refer this table in the text
-\end{table}
-
-A simulation
-ends when all the nodes are dead or the sensor network becomes
-disconnected (some nodes may not be able to send, to a base station, an
-event they sense).
-Our proposed coverage protocol uses a simple energy model
-defined by~\cite{ChinhVu} that based on ~\cite{raghunathan2002energy} with some modification as energy consumption model for each wireless sensor node in the network and for all the simulations.
-
-The modification is to add the energy consumption for receiving the packets as well as we ignore the part that related to the sensing range because we used fixed sensing range. The new energy consumption model will take inro account the energy consumption for communication (packet transmission/reception), data sensing and computational energy.
-There are four subsystems in each sensor node that consume energy: the micro-controller
-unit (MCU) subsystem which is capable of computation, communication subsystem which is responsible for
-transmitting/receiving messages, sensing subsystem that collects data, and the powe suply which supplies power to the complete sensor node ~\cite{raghunathan2002energy}. In our model, we will concentrate on first three main subsystems and each subsystem can be turned on or off depending on the current status of the sensor which is summarized in Table~\ref{table4}.
-
-\begin{table}[ht]
-\caption{The Energy Consumption Model}
-% title of Table
-\centering
-% used for centering table
-\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|}
-% centered columns (4 columns)
- \hline
-%inserts double horizontal lines
-Sensor mode & MCU & Radio & Sensing & Power (mW) \\ [0.5ex]
-\hline
-% inserts single horizontal line
-Listening & On & On & On & 20.05 \\
-% inserting body of the table
-\hline
-Active & On & Off & On & 9.72 \\
-\hline
-Sleep & Off & Off & Off & 0.02 \\
-\hline
- \multicolumn{4}{|c|}{Energy needed to send/receive a 1-bit} & 0.2575\\
- \hline
-\end{tabular}
-
-\label{table4}
-% is used to refer this table in the text
-\end{table}
-
-For the simplicity, we ignore the energy needed to turn on the
-radio, to start up the sensor node, the transition from mode to another, etc. We also do not consider the need of collecting sensing data. Thus, when a sensor becomes active (i.e., it already decides it status), it can turn its radio off to save battery. Since our couverage optimization protocol uses two types of the packets, the size of the INFO-Packet and Status-Packet are 112 bits and 16 bits respectively. The value of energy spent to send a message shown in Table~\ref{table4} is obtained by using the equation in ~\cite{raghunathan2002energy} to calculate the energy cost for transmitting messages and we propose the same value for receiving the packets.
-
-
-We performed simulations for five different densities varying from 50 to 250~nodes. Experimental results
-were obtained from randomly generated networks in which nodes are
-deployed over a $(50 \times 25)~m^2 $ sensing field. More precisely, the deployment is controlled at a coarse scale in order to ensure that the deployed nodes can fully cover the sensing
- field with the given sensing range.
-The energy of each node in a network is initialized randomly within the
-range 50-75~joules. Each sensor node will not participate in the next round if its remaining energy is less than $E_{thr}$, the minimum energy needed for the node to stay alive during one round.
-
-In the simulations, we introduce the following performance metrics to
-evaluate the efficiency of our approach:
-
-(i) Coverage Ratio (CR): the coverage ratio measures how much the area of a sensor field is covered. In our case, we treated the sensing fields as a grid, and used each grid point as a sample point
-for calculating the coverage. The coverage ratio can be calculated by:
-\begin{equation*}
-\scriptsize
-\mbox{CR}(\%) = \frac{\mbox{$n$}}{\mbox{$N$}} \times 100.
-\end{equation*}
-Where: $n$ is the Number of Covered Grid points by the Active Sensors of the all subregions of the network during the current sensing phase and $N$ is total number of grid points in the sensing field of the network.
-The accuracy of this method depends on the distance between grids. In our
-simulations, the sensing field has been divided into 50 by 25 grid points, which means
-there are $51~x~26~ = ~ 1326$ points in total. Therefore, for our simulations, the error in the coverage calculation is less than ~ 1 $\% $.
-
-(ii) Number of Active Sensors Ratio(ASR): It is important to have as few active nodes as possible in each round,
-in order to minimize the communication overhead and maximize the
-network lifetime.The Active Sensors Ratio is defined as follows:
-\begin{equation*}
-\scriptsize
-\mbox{ASR}(\%) = \sum\limits_{r=1}^R \left( \frac{\mbox{$A_r$}}{\mbox{$S$}} \times 100 \right) .
-\end{equation*}
-Where: $A_r$ is the number of active sensors in the subregion $r$ during the current sensing phase, $S$ is the total number of sensors in the network, and $R$ is the total number of the subregions in the network.
-
-(iii) Energy Saving Ratio(ESR):is defined by:
-\begin{equation*}
-\scriptsize
-\mbox{ESR}(\%) = \sum\limits_{r=1}^R \left( \frac{\mbox{${ES}_r$}}{\mbox{$S$}} \times 100 \right) .
-\end{equation*}
-Where: ${ES}_r$ is the number of alive sensors in subregion $r$ during this round. The longer the ratio is, the more redundant sensor nodes are switched off, and consequently the longer the network may live.
-
-(iv) Energy Consumption:
-
- Energy Consumption (EC) can be seen as the total energy consumed by the sensors during the lifetime of the network divided by the total number of rounds. The EC can be computed as follow: \\
- \begin{equation*}
-\scriptsize
-\mbox{EC} = \frac{\mbox{$\sum\limits_{d=1}^D \left( E^c_d + E^l_d + E^a_d + E^s_d \right)$ }}{\mbox{$D$}} .
-\end{equation*}
-%\begin{equation*}
-%\scriptsize
-%\mbox{EC} = \frac{\mbox{$\sum\limits_{d=1}^D E^c_d$}}{\mbox{$D$}} + \frac{\mbox{$\sum\limits_{d=1}^D %E^l_d$}}{\mbox{$D$}} + \frac{\mbox{$\sum\limits_{d=1}^D E^a_d$}}{\mbox{$D$}} + %\frac{\mbox{$\sum\limits_{d=1}^D E^s_d$}}{\mbox{$D$}}.
-%\end{equation*}
-
-Where: D is the total number of rounds.
-The total energy consumed by the sensors (EC) comes through taking into consideration four main energy factors, which are $E^c_d$, $E^l_d$, $E^a_d$, and $E^s_d$.
-The factor $E^c_d$ represents the energy consumption resulting from wireless communications is calculated by taking into account the energy spent by all the nodes when transmitting and
-receiving packets during round $d$. The $E^l_d$ represents the energy consumed by all the sensors during the listening mode before taking the decision to go Active or Sleep in round $d$. The $E^a_d$ and $E^s_d$ are refered to enegy consumed by the turned on and turned off sensors in the period of sensing during the round $d$.
-
-(v) Network Lifetime: we have defined the network lifetime as the time until all
-nodes have been drained of their energy or each sensor network monitoring an area has become disconnected.
-
-
-(vi) Execution Time: a sensor node has limited energy resources and computing power,
-therefore it is important that the proposed algorithm has the shortest
-possible execution time. The energy of a sensor node must be mainly
-used for the sensing phase, not for the pre-sensing ones.
-
-(vii)The number of stopped simulation runs: we will study the percentage of simulations, which are stopped due to network disconnections per round.
-
-
-
-\subsection{Performance Comparison for differnet subregions}
-\label{sub1}
-In this subsection, we will study the performance of our approach for a different number of regions (Leaders).
-10~simulation runs are performed with different network topologies for each node density. The results presented hereafter are the average of these 10 runs.
-Our approach are called strategy 1 ( With One Leader), strategy 2 ( With Two Leaders), strategy 3 ( With Four Leaders), and strategy 4 ( With Eight Leaders). The strategy 1 ( With One Leader) is a centralized approach on all the area of the interest, while strategy 2 ( With Two Leaders), strategy 3 ( With Four Leaders), and strategy 4 ( With Eight Leaders) are distributed on two, four, and eight subregions respectively.
-\subsubsection{The impact of the number of rounds on the coverage ratio}
-In this experiment, Figure~\ref{fig3} shows the impact of the
-number of rounds on the average coverage ratio for 150 deployed nodes
-for the four strategies.
-\parskip 0pt
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
- \includegraphics[scale=0.43] {R1/CR.eps}
-\caption{The impact of the number of rounds on the coverage ratio for 150 deployed nodes}
-\label{fig3}
-\end{figure}
-
-It can be seen that the four strategies
-give nearly similar coverage ratios during the first three rounds.
-As shown in the figure ~\ref{fig3}, when we increase the number of sub-regions, It will leads to cover the area of interest for a larger number of rounds. Coverage ratio decreases when the number of rounds increases due to dead nodes. Although some nodes are dead,
-thanks to strategy~4, other nodes are preserved to ensure the
-coverage. Moreover, when we have a dense sensor network, it leads to
-maintain the full coverage for a larger number of rounds. Strategy~4 is
-slightly more efficient than other strategies, because strategy~4 subdivides
-the Area of interest into 8~subregions and if one of the eight subregions becomes
-disconnected, the coverage may be still ensured in the remaining
-subregions.
-
-\subsubsection{The impact of the number of rounds on the active sensors ratio}
- Figure~\ref{fig4} shows the average active nodes ratio versus the number of rounds
-for 150 deployed nodes.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R1/ASR.eps}
-\caption{The impact of the number of rounds on the active sensors ratio for 150 deployed nodes }
-\label{fig4}
-\end{figure}
-
-The results presented in figure~\ref{fig4} show the superiority of
-the proposed strategy 4, in comparison with the other strategies. The
-strategy with less number of leaders uses less active nodes than the other strategies, which uses a more number of leaders until the last rounds, because it uses central control on
-the larger area of the sensing field. The advantage of the strategy~4 approach is
-that even if a network is disconnected in one subregion, the other ones
-usually continues the optimization process, and this extends the lifetime of the network.
-
-\subsubsection{The impact of the number of rounds on the energy saving ratio}
-In this experiment, we consider a performance metric linked to energy. Figure~\ref{fig5} shows the average Energy Saving Ratio versus number of rounds for all four strategies and for 150 deployed nodes.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R1/ESR.eps}
-\caption{The impact of the number of rounds on the energy saving ratio for 150 deployed nodes}
-\label{fig5}
-\end{figure}
-
-The simulation results show that our strategies allow to efficiently
-save energy by turning off some sensors during the sensing phase. As
-expected, the strategy 4 is usually slightly better than
-the other strategies, because the distributed optimization on larger number of subregions permits to minimize the energy needed for communication and It led to save more energy obviously. Indeed, when there are more than one subregion more nodes
-remain awake near the border shared by them but the energy consumed by these nodes have no effect in comparison with the energy consumed by the communication. Note that again as the number of rounds increases the strategy 4 becomes the most
-performing one, since it takes longer to have the eight subregion networks
-simultaneously disconnected.
-
-\subsubsection{The percentage of stopped simulation runs}
-Figure~\ref{fig6} illustrates the percentage of stopped simulation
-runs per round for 150 deployed nodes.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.43]{R1/SR.eps}
-\caption{The percentage of stopped simulation runs compared to the number of rounds for 150 deployed nodes }
-\label{fig6}
-\end{figure}
-It can be observed that the
-strategy 1 is the approach which stops first because it apply the
-centralized control on all the area of interest That is why it is first exhibits network disconnections. Thus, as explained previously, in case of the strategy 4 with several subregions the optimization effectively continues as long as a network in a
-subregion is still connected. This longer partial coverage
-optimization participates in extending the network lifetime.
-
-\subsubsection{The Energy Consumption}
-In this experiment, we study the effect of the energy consumed by the sensors during the communication , listening, active, and sleep modes for different network densities. Figure~\ref{fig7} illustrates the energy consumption for the different
-network sizes and for the four proposed stratgies.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R1/EC.eps}
-\caption{The Energy Consumption}
-\label{fig7}
-\end{figure}
-
-The results show that the strategy with eight leaders is the most competitive from the energy
-consumption point of view. The other strategies have a high energy consumption due to many
-communications as well as the energy consumed during the listening before taking the decision. In fact, a distributed method on the subregions greatly reduces the number of communications and the time of listening so thanks to the partitioning of the initial
-network in several independent subnetworks.
-
-
-\subsubsection{The impact of the number of sensors on execution time}
-In this experiment, we study the the impact of the size of the network on the excution time of the our distributed optimization approach. Table~\ref{table1} gives the average execution times in seconds for the decision phase (solving of the optimization problem)
-during one round. They are given for the different approaches and
-various numbers of sensors. We can see from Table~\ref{table1}, that the strategy 4 has very low execution times in comparison with other strategies, because it distributed on larger number of small subregions. Conversely, the strategy 1 which requires to solve an optimization problem considering all the nodes presents high execution times.
-Moreover, increasing the network size by 50~nodes multiplies the time
-by almost a factor of 10. The strategy 4 has more
-suitable times. We think that in distributed fashion the solving of
-the optimization problem in a subregion can be tackled by sensor
-nodes. Overall, to be able to deal with very large networks, a
-distributed method is clearly required.
-\begin{table}[ht]
-\caption{The Execution Time(s) vs The Number of Sensors}
-% title of Table
-\centering
-% used for centering table
-\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|}
-% centered columns (4 columns)
- \hline
-%inserts double horizontal lines
-Sensors number & Strategy~1 & Strategy~2 & Strategy~3 & Strategy~4 \\ [0.5ex]
-\hline
-% inserts single horizontal line
-50 & 0.1848396 & 0.04655324 & 0.0117669418 & 0.0033982841 \\
-% inserting body of the table
-\hline
-100 & 1.895704 & 0.2190363 & 0.0445454425 & 0.0111192651 \\
-\hline
-150 & 12.211936 & 0.6322759 & 0.095189135 & 0.0228475025 \\
-\hline
-200 & 152.25806 & 2.285319 & 0.184868 & 0.0412940988 \\
-\hline
-250 & 1542.5396 & 5.656081 & 0.3147647 & 0.0609174088 \\
-% [1ex] adds vertical space
-\hline
-%inserts single line
-\end{tabular}
-\label{table1}
-% is used to refer this table in the text
-\end{table}
-
-\subsubsection{The Network Lifetime}
-Finally, in figure~\ref{fig8}, the
-network lifetime for different network sizes and for the four strategies is illustrated.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R1/LT.eps}
-\caption{The Network Lifetime }
-\label{fig8}
-\end{figure}
-We see that the strategy 1 results in execution times that quickly become unsuitable for a sensor network as well as the energy consumed during the communication seems to be huge because it used a centralised control on the all the area of interest.
-
-As highlighted by figure~\ref{fig8}, the network lifetime obviously
-increases when the size of the network increases, with our approach strategy~4
-that leads to the larger lifetime improvement. By choosing the best
-suited nodes, for each round, to cover the Area of interest and by
-letting the other ones sleep in order to be used later in next rounds,
-our strategy~4 efficiently prolonges the network lifetime. Comparison shows that
-the Strategy~4, which uses eight leaders, is the best
-one because it is robust to network disconnection during the network lifetime. It
-also means that distributing the algorithm in each node and
-subdividing the sensing field into many subregions, which are managed
-independently and simultaneously, is the most relevant way to maximize
-the lifetime of a network.
-
-
-\subsection{Performance Comparison for Differnet Primary Point Models}
-\label{sub2}
-Based on the results, which are conducted in subsection~\ref{sub1}, we will study the performance of the Strategy~4 approach for a different primary point models.
-50~simulation runs are performed with different network topologies for each node density. The results presented hereafter are the average of these 50 runs.
-In this comparisons, our approaches are called Model~1( With 5 Primary Points), Model~2 ( With 13 Primary Points), Model~3 ( With 17 Primary Points), and Model~4 ( With 21 Primary Points). The simulation will applied with strategy~4 by subdividing the area of interest into eight subregions and distribute our strategy~4 approach on the all subregions.
-\subsubsection{The impact of the number of rounds on the coverage ratio}
-In this experiment, we Figure~\ref{fig33} shows the impact of the
-number of rounds on the average coverage ratio for 150 deployed nodes
-for the four strategies.
-\parskip 0pt
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
- \includegraphics[scale=0.5] {R2/CR.eps}
-\caption{The impact of the number of rounds on the coverage ratio for 150 deployed nodes}
-\label{fig33}
-\end{figure}
-It is shown that Model~4 and Model~3 provides a
-better coverage ratio with 99.5\% and 99.4\% against 99.2\% and 98.1\% produced by
-model~2 and Model~1 for the first ninth rounds, because they are used a larger number of primary points to represent the sensing range of the sensor during optimization process. Moreover, when the number of rounds increases, coverage
-ratio produced by Model~4 and Model~3 decreases in comparison with Model~1 and Model~2 due to the high energy consumption during the listening to take the decision after finishing optimization process for larger number of primary points. As shown in the figure ~\ref{fig33}, Coverage ratio decreases when the number of rounds increases due to dead nodes. Although some nodes are dead,
-thanks to Model~2, which is slightly more efficient than other Models, because Model~2 balances between the number of rounds and the better coverage ratio in comparison with other Models.
-
-\subsubsection{The impact of the number of rounds on the active sensors ratio}
- Figure~\ref{fig44} shows the average active nodes ratio versus the number of rounds
-for 150 deployed nodes.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R2/ASR.eps}
-\caption{The impact of the number of rounds on the active sensors ratio for 150 deployed nodes }
-\label{fig44}
-\end{figure}
-
-The results presented in figure~\ref{fig44} show the superiority of
-the proposed Model 1, in comparison with the other Models. The
-model with less number of primary points uses less active nodes than the other models, which uses a more number of primary points to represent the area of the sensor. According to the results that presented in figure~\ref{fig33}, we observe that although the Model~1 continue to a larger number of rounds, but it has less coverage ratio compared with other models.The advantage of the Model~2 approach is to use less number of active nodes for each round compared with Model~3 and Model~4, and this led to continue for a larger number of rounds with extending the network lifetime. Model~2 has a better coverage ratio compared to Model~1 and acceptable number of rounds.
-
-\subsubsection{The impact of the number of rounds on the energy saving ratio}
-In this experiment, we study the effect of increasing primary points on the energy conservation in the wireless sensor network. Figure~\ref{fig55} shows the average Energy Saving Ratio versus number of rounds for all four Models and for 150 deployed nodes.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R2/ESR.eps}
-\caption{The impact of the number of rounds on the energy saving ratio for 150 deployed nodes}
-\label{fig55}
-\end{figure}
-The simulation results show that our Models allow to efficiently
-save energy by turning off the redundant sensors during the sensing phase.
- As expected, the Model 1 is usually slightly better than the other Models, because it turn on a less number of nodes during the sensing phase in comparison with other models and according to the results, which are observed in figure ~\ref{fig33}, and It led to save more energy obviously.
- Indeed, when there are more primary points to represent the area of the sensor leads to activate more nodes to cover them and in the same time ensuring more coverage ratio. From the previous presented results, we see it is preferable to choose the model that balance between the coverage ratio and the number of rounds. The Model~2 becomes the most performing one, since it could apply this requirement where, It can coverage the area of interest with a good coverage ratio and for a larger number of rounds prolonging the lifetime of the wireless sensor network.
-
-\subsubsection{The percentage of stopped simulation runs}
-In this study, we want to show the effect of increasing the primary points on the number of stopped simulation runs for each round. Figure~\ref{fig66} illustrates the percentage of stopped simulation
-runs per round for 150 deployed nodes.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R2/SR.eps}
-\caption{The percentage of stopped simulation runs compared to the number of rounds for 150 deployed nodes }
-\label{fig66}
-\end{figure}
-As shown in Figure~\ref{fig66}, when the number of primary points increase leads to increase the percentage of the stopped simulation runs per rounds and starting from round 11 until the the network is died. The reason behind the increase is the increase in the sensors dead When the primary points increases. We can observe that the Model~1 is a better than other models because it conserve more energy by turn on less number of sensors during the sensing phase, but in the same time it preserve the coverage with a less coverage ratio in comparison with other models. Model~2 seems to be more suitable to be used in sensor networks.
-
-
-\subsubsection{The Energy Consumption}
-In this experiment, we study the effect of increasing the primary points to represent the area of the sensor on the the energy consumed by the wireless sensor network for different network densities. Figure~\ref{fig77} illustrates the energy consumption for the different
-network sizes and for the four proposed Models.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R2/EC.eps}
-\caption{The Energy Consumption}
-\label{fig77}
-\end{figure}
-
-We see from the results presented in Figure~\ref{fig77}, The energy consumed by the network for each round increases when the primary points increases, because the decision for optimization process will takes more time leads to consume more energy during the listening mode. The results show that the Model~1 is the most competitive from the energy
-consumption point of view but the worst one from coverage ratio point of view. The other Models have a high energy consumption due to the increase in the primary points, which are led to increase the energy consumption during the listening mode before taking the optimization decision. In fact, we see that the Model~2 is a good candidate to be used the wireless sensor network because I have a good coverage ratio and a suitable energy consumption in comparison with other models.
-
-
-\subsubsection{The impact of the number of sensors on execution time}
-In this experiment, we study the the impact of the increase in primary points on the excution time of the our distributed optimization approach. Table~\ref{table11} gives the average execution times in seconds for the decision phase (solving of the optimization problem) during one round.
-\begin{table}[ht]
-\caption{The Execution Time(s) vs The Number of Sensors}
-% title of Table
-\centering
-% used for centering table
-\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|}
-% centered columns (4 columns)
- \hline
-%inserts double horizontal lines
-Sensors number & Model~1 & Model~2 & Model~3 & Model~4 \\ [0.5ex]
-\hline
-% inserts single horizontal line
-50 & 0.0024106288 & 0.0034540527 & 0.0045273282 & 0.0064475788 \\
-% inserting body of the table
-\hline
-100 & 0.0045475502 & 0.0104693717 & 0.0144968192 & 0.0198072788 \\
-\hline
-150 & 0.0090504642 & 0.0224529648 & 0.031136629 & 0.0442327285 \\
-\hline
-200 & 0.0156788154 & 0.0412170018 & 0.0566654188 & 0.0785000165 \\
-\hline
-250 & 0.023145026 & 0.0618075108 & 0.0853965538 & 0.1195402003 \\
-% [1ex] adds vertical space
-\hline
-%inserts single line
-\end{tabular}
-\label{table11}
-% is used to refer this table in the text
-\end{table}
-
-They are given for the different primary point models and
-various numbers of sensors. We can see from Table~\ref{table11}, that the Model~1 has lower execution time in comparison with other Models, because it used smaller number of primary points to represent the area of the sensor. Conversely, the other primary point models presents higher execution times.
-Moreover, the Model~2 has more suitable times, coverage ratio, and saving energy ratio leads to continue for a larger number of rounds extending the network lifetime. We think that a good primary point model, this one that balances between the coverage ratio and the number of rounds during the lifetime of the network.
-
-\subsubsection{The Network Lifetime}
-Finally, we will study the effect of increasing the primary points on the lifetime of the network. In figure~\ref{fig88}, the network lifetime for different network sizes and for the four proposed models is illustrated.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R2/LT.eps}
-\caption{The Network Lifetime }
-\label{fig88}
-\end{figure}
-As highlighted by figure~\ref{fig88}, the network lifetime obviously
-increases when the size of the network increases, with our approach Model~1
-that leads to the larger lifetime improvement.
-Comparison shows that the Model~1, which uses less number of primary points , is the best one because it is less energy consumption during the network lifetime. It is also the worst one from the point of view of coverage ratio. Our proposed Model~2 efficiently prolongs the network lifetime with a good coverage ratio in comparison with other models.
-
-\subsection{Performance Comparison for differnet Approaches}
-Based on the results, which are conducted from previous two subsections, ~\ref{sub1} and \ref{sub2}, we found that the Strategy~4 with Model~2 is the best candidate to be compared with other two approches. The first approach, called DESK that proposed by ~\cite{ChinhVu}, which is a full distributed coverage algorithm. The second approach, called Simple Heuristic,
-consists in uniformly dividing the region into squares of $(5 \times
-5)~m^2$. During the decision phase, in each square, a sensor is
-randomly chosen, it will remain turned on for the coming sensing
-phase. In this subsection, 50 simulation runs are
-performed with different network topologies. The results
-presented hereafter are the average of these 50 runs.
-
-\subsubsection{The impact of the number of rounds on the coverage ratio}
-In this experiment, Figure~\ref{fig333} shows the impact of the
-number of rounds on the average coverage ratio for 150 deployed nodes
-for the three approaches.
-\parskip 0pt
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
- \includegraphics[scale=0.45] {R3/CR.eps}
-\caption{The impact of the number of rounds on the coverage ratio for 150 deployed nodes}
-\label{fig333}
-\end{figure}
-
-It is shown that DESK provides a
-better coverage ratio with 99.9 \% against 99.2 \% produced by
-our approach Strategy~4 for the lowest number of rounds. This is due to
-the fact that our protocol Strategy~4 put in sleep mode
-redundant sensors using optimization (which lightly decreases the coverage
-ratio) while there are more nodes are active in the case of DESK.
-Moreover, when the number of rounds increases, coverage
-ratio produced by DESK protocol decreases. This is due to dead nodes. However, Our protocol Strategy~4 maintains almost full
-coverage. This is because it optimize the coverage and the lifetime in wireless sensor network by selecting the best representative sensor nodes to take the reponsibilty of coverage during the sensing phase and this will leads to continue for a larger number of rounds and prolonging the network lifetime; although some nodes are dead, sensor activity scheduling of our protocol chooses other nodes to ensure the coverage of the area of interest. It can be seen that the Simple Heuristic approach gives similar coverage ratios 99.8 \% during the first four rounds. From the
-5th~round the coverage ratio decreases continuously and quickly with the simple heuristic until the 8th~round, the network is died.
-
-\subsubsection{The impact of the number of rounds on the active sensors ratio}
-It is important to have as few active nodes as possible in each round,
-in order to minimize the communication overhead and maximize the
-network lifetime. Figure~\ref{fig444} shows the average active nodes ratio versus the number of rounds for 150 deployed nodes.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R3/ASR.eps}
-\caption{The impact of the number of rounds on the active sensors ratio for 150 deployed nodes }
-\label{fig444}
-\end{figure}
-
-The results presented in figure~\ref{fig444} show the superiority of
-the proposed protocol with Strategy~4, in comparison with the other approaches. We can observe that DESK has 37.5 \% active nodes and our protocol with Strategy~4
-competes perfectly with only 22.6 \% active nodes for the first four rounds. Then as the number of rounds increases our protocol with Strategy~4 generates less active nodes than DESK until the $10^{th}$ round, we see that the DESK has less number of active nodes because there are many nodes are died due to the high energy consumption by the redundant nodes during the sensing phase. The Simple Heuristic turn on 33.3 \% for the first four rounds after that the number of active nodes decreased in the next rounds due to the died nodes until the died of the network in the $8^{th}$ round.
-
-\subsubsection{The impact of the number of rounds on the energy saving ratio}
-In this experiment, we will perform a comparison study for the performance of our protocol with Strategy~4 with two other approaches from the point of view of energy conservation. Figure~\ref{fig555} shows the average Energy Saving Ratio versus number of rounds for all three approaches and for 150 deployed nodes.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R3/ESR.eps}
-\caption{The impact of the number of rounds on the energy saving ratio for 150 deployed nodes}
-\label{fig555}
-\end{figure}
-The simulation results show that our protocol with Strategy~4 allow to efficiently
-save energy by turning off the redundant sensors during the sensing phase. As
-expected, our protocol with Strategy~4 is usually slightly better than
-the other approaches, because the distributed optimization on the subregions permits to minimize the energy needed for communication as well as turn off all the redundant sensor nodes, which are led to save more energy obviously. Note that again as the number of rounds increases, our protocol with Strategy~4 becomes the most performing one, since it is distributed the optimization process on the eight subregion networks simultaneously so as to optimize the coverage and the lifetime in the network.
-
-\subsubsection{The percentage of stopped simulation runs}
-The results presented in this experiment, is to show the comparison of our protocol with Strategy~4 with other two approaches from the point of view the stopped simulation runs per round.
-Figure~\ref{fig666} illustrates the percentage of stopped simulation
-runs per round for 150 deployed nodes.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.4]{R3/SR.eps}
-\caption{The percentage of stopped simulation runs compared to the number of rounds for 150 deployed nodes }
-\label{fig666}
-\end{figure}
-It can be observed that the Simple Heuristic is the approach, which stops first because it consumes more energy for communication as well as it turn on a large number of redundant nodes during the sensing phase. Our protocol with Strategy~4 has less stopped simulation runs in comparison with DESK because it distributed the optimization on several subregions in order to optimize the coverage and the lifetime of the network by activating a less number of nodes during the sensing phase leading to extend the network lifetime and coverage preservation.The optimization effectively continues as long as a network in a subregion is still connected.
-
-\subsubsection{The Energy Consumption}
-In this experiment, we study the effect of the energy consumed by the wireless sensor network during the communication , listening, active, and sleep modes for different network densities and compare it with other approaches. Figure~\ref{fig777} illustrates the energy consumption for the different
-network sizes and for the three approaches.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R3/EC.eps}
-\caption{The Energy Consumption}
-\label{fig777}
-\end{figure}
-The results show that our protocol with Strategy~4 is the most competitive from the energy consumption point of view. The other approaches have a high energy consumption due to activating a larger number of redundant nodes as well as the energy consumed for communication, active and listening modes. In fact, a distributed method on the subregions greatly reduces the number of communications and the time of listening so thanks to the partitioning of the initial network into several independent subnetworks.
-\subsubsection{The Network Lifetime}
-Finally, In this experiment, we will show the superiority of our protocol with Strategy~4 against other two approaches in prolonging the network lifetime. In Figure~\ref{fig888}, the
-network lifetime for different network sizes and for the four strategies is illustrated.
-\begin{figure}[h!]
-\centering
-\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{R3/LT.eps}
-\caption{The Network Lifetime }
-\label{fig888}
-\end{figure}
-
-As highlighted by figure~\ref{fig888}, the network lifetime obviously
-increases when the size of the network increases, with our protocol with Strategy~4
-that leads to maximize the lifetime of the network compared with other approaches.
-By choosing the best suited nodes, for each round, by optimizing the coverage and lifetime of the network to cover the area of interest and by
-letting the other ones sleep in order to be used later in next rounds, our protocol with Strategy~4 efficiently prolonges the network lifetime.
-Comparison shows that our protocol with Strategy~4, which uses distributed optimization on the subregions, is the best
-one because it is robust to network disconnection during the network lifetime as well as it consume less energy in comparison with other approaches. It also means that distributing the algorithm in each node and subdividing the sensing field into many subregions, which are managed
-independently and simultaneously, is the most relevant way to maximize the lifetime of a network.
-
-\section{Conclusion and future works}
-\label{sec:conclusion}
-
-In this paper, we have addressed the problem of the coverage and the lifetime
-optimization in wireless sensor networks. This is a key issue as
-sensor nodes have limited resources in terms of memory, energy and
-computational power. To cope with this problem, the field of sensing
-is divided into smaller subregions using the concept of
-divide-and-conquer method, and then a multi-rounds coverage protocol
-will optimize coverage and lifetime performances in each subregion.
-The proposed protocol combines two efficient techniques: network
-leader election and sensor activity scheduling, where the challenges
-include how to select the most efficient leader in each subregion and
-the best representative active nodes that will optimize the network lifetime
-while taking the responsibility of covering the corresponding
-subregion. The network lifetime in each subregion is divided into
-rounds, each round consists of four phases: (i) Information Exchange,
-(ii) Leader Election, (iii) an optimization-based Decision in order to
-select the nodes remaining active for the last phase, and (iv)
-Sensing. The simulations show the relevance of the proposed
-protocol in terms of lifetime, coverage ratio, active sensors ratio,
-energy saving, energy consumption, execution time, and the number of
-stopped simulation runs due to network disconnection. Indeed, when
-dealing with large and dense wireless sensor networks, a distributed
-approach like the one we propose allows to reduce the difficulty of a
-single global optimization problem by partitioning it in many smaller
-problems, one per subregion, that can be solved more easily.
-
-In future work, we plan to study and propose a coverage protocol which
-computes all active sensor schedules in one time, using
-optimization methods such as swarms optimization or evolutionary
-algorithms. The round will still consist of 4 phases, but the
- decision phase will compute the schedules for several sensing phases
- which, aggregated together, define a kind of meta-sensing phase.
-The computation of all cover sets in one time is far more
-difficult, but will reduce the communication overhead.
-% use section* for acknowledgement
-%\section*{Acknowledgment}
-
-
-
-
-\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran}
-\bibliography{biblio}
-
-
-%\appendices
-%\section{Proof of the First Zonklar Equation}
-%Appendix one text goes here.
-
-% you can choose not to have a title for an appendix
-% if you want by leaving the argument blank
-%\section{}
-%Appendix two text goes here.
-
-
-% use section* for acknowledgement
-\section*{Acknowledgment}
-
-We would like to thank , and also thank anonymous reviewers for their constructive comments which helped us to
-improve the quality of this paper.
-
-
-
-% Can use something like this to put references on a page
-% by themselves when using endfloat and the captionsoff option.
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
- \newpage
-\fi
-
-
-
-
-\end{document}
-
-
